P83C661X2 [NXP]

80C51 8-bit microcontroller family; 80C51的8位微控制器系列
P83C661X2
型号: P83C661X2
厂家: NXP    NXP
描述:

80C51 8-bit microcontroller family
80C51的8位微控制器系列

微控制器
文件: 总102页 (文件大小:563K)
中文:  中文翻译
下载:  下载PDF数据表文档文件
INTEGRATED CIRCUITS  
P83C660X2, P87C660X2  
P83C661X2, P87C661X2  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family  
16KB OTP/ROM, 512B RAM low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V),  
low power, high speed (30/33 MHz), two 400KB I2C  
interfaces  
Product data  
Supersedes data of 2003 Jun 19  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips  
Semiconductors  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM,  
512B RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed  
(30/33 MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
CMOS and TTL compatible  
Two speed ranges at V = 5 V  
CC  
0 to 30 MHz with 6-clock operation  
0 to 33 MHz with 12-clock operation  
Parallel programming with 87C51 compatible hardware interface  
to programmer  
RAM expandable externally to 64 kbytes  
DESCRIPTION  
Programmable Counter Array (PCA)  
PWM  
The devices are Single-Chip 8-Bit Microcontrollers manufactured in  
an advanced CMOS process and are derivatives of the 80C51  
microcontroller family. The instruction set is 100% compatible with  
the 80C51 instruction set.  
Capture/compare  
PLCC and LQFP packages  
Extended temperature ranges  
Dual Data Pointers  
The devices support 6-clock/12-clock mode selection by  
programming an OTP bit (OX2) using parallel programming. In  
addition, an SFR bit (X2) in the clock control register (CKCON)  
also selects between 6-clock/12-clock mode.  
Security bits (3 bits)  
2
These devices have either one or two I C interfaces, capable of  
handling speeds up to 400 kbits/s (Fast I C). They also have four  
8-bit I/O ports, three 16-bit timer/event counters, a multi-source,  
four-priority-level, nested interrupt structure, an enhanced UART and  
on-chip oscillator and timing circuits.  
2
Encryption array - 64 bytes  
8/9 interrupt sources  
Four interrupt priority levels  
The added features of the P8xC66xX2 make it a powerful  
Four 8-bit I/O ports  
microcontroller for applications that require pulse width modulation,  
2
2
One I C serial port interface has a selectable data transfer mode,  
high-speed I/O, I C communication, and up/down counting  
either 400 kB/sec Fast-mode or 100 kB/sec Standard-mode  
(8xC660X2 and 8xC661X2)  
capabilities such as motor control.  
2
A second I C serial port interface has the 400 kB/sec Fast  
FEATURES  
data-transfer mode only and selectable slew rate control of the  
output pins (8xC661X2)  
80C51 Central Processing Unit  
16 kbytes OTP (87C660X2, 87C661X2)  
16 kbytes ROM (83C660X2, 83C661X2)  
512 byte RAM  
Full-duplex enhanced UART  
Framing error detection  
Automatic address recognition  
Boolean processor  
Three 16-bit timers/counters T0, T1 (standard 80C51) and  
Fully static operation  
additional T2 (capture and compare)  
Low voltage (2.7 V to 5.5 V at 16 MHz) operation  
Programmable clock-out pin  
Asynchronous port reset  
12-clock operation with selectable 6-clock operation (via software  
or via parallel programmer)  
Low EMI (inhibit ALE, slew rate controlled outputs, and 6-clock  
Memory addressing capability  
Up to 64 kbytes ROM and 64 kbytes RAM  
mode)  
Wake-up from Power Down by an external interrupt  
Power control modes:  
Clock can be stopped and resumed  
Idle mode  
Power-down mode  
2
2003 Oct 02  
853-2416 30396  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
SELECTION TABLE  
Serial  
Interfaces  
Type  
Memory  
Timers  
Freq.  
Range  
at 3V at  
(MHz) (MHz)  
(6-clk / (6-clk  
Freq.  
Range  
Max.  
Freq.  
at 6-clk  
/ 12-clk  
(MHz)  
5V  
/
12-clk)  
12-clk)  
P87C660X2  
P83C660X2  
P87C661X2  
P83C661X2  
512B  
512B  
512B  
512B  
16K  
4
4
4
4
1
1
2
2
32  
32  
32  
32  
7(2)/4  
7(2)/4  
7(2)/4  
7(2)/4  
12-clk  
12-clk  
12-clk  
12-clk  
6-clk  
6-clk  
6-clk  
6-clk  
H
H
H
H
30/33  
30/33  
30/33  
30/33  
0-16  
0-30/33  
0-30/33  
0-30/33  
0-30/33  
16K  
16K  
0-16  
0-16  
16K  
0-16  
ORDERING INFORMATION  
Temp Range  
(°C)  
Type number  
Package  
Name  
OTP  
ROM  
RAM  
512B  
512B  
Description  
plastic leaded chip carrier; 44 leads  
Version  
P83C660X2FA  
16 KB  
16 KB  
PLCC44  
LQFP44  
SOT187–2 –40 to +85  
P83C660X2BBD  
plastic low profile quad flat package; 44 leads; SOT389–1 0 to +70  
body 10   10   1.4 mm  
P87C660X2FA  
16 KB  
16 KB  
512B  
512B  
PLCC44  
LQFP44  
plastic leaded chip carrier; 44 leads  
SOT187–2 –40 to +85  
P87C660X2BBD  
plastic low profile quad flat package; 44 leads; SOT389–1 0 to +70  
body 10   10   1.4 mm  
P83C661X2FA  
16 KB  
16 KB  
512B  
512B  
PLCC44  
LQFP44  
plastic leaded chip carrier; 44 leads  
SOT187–2 –40 to +85  
P83C661X2BBD  
plastic low profile quad flat package; 44 leads; SOT389–1 0 to +70  
body 10   10   1.4 mm  
P87C661X2FA  
16 KB  
16 KB  
512B  
512B  
PLCC44  
LQFP44  
plastic leaded chip carrier; 44 leads  
SOT187–2 –40 to +85  
P87C661X2BBD  
plastic low profile quad flat package; 44 leads; SOT389–1 0 to +70  
body 10   10   1.4 mm  
3
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
BLOCK DIAGRAM 1  
ACCELERATED 80C51 CPU  
(12-CLK MODE, 6-CLK MODE)  
8K / 16K / 32K /  
64 KBYTE  
CODE OTP  
FULL-DUPLEX  
ENHANCED UART  
512 / 1024 BYTE  
DATA RAM  
TIMER 0  
TIMER 1  
PORT 3  
CONFIGURABLE I/Os  
TIMER 2  
PORT 2  
CONFIGURABLE I/Os  
PROGRAMMABLE  
COUNTER ARRAY  
(PCA)  
PORT 1  
CONFIGURABLE I/Os  
WATCHDOG TIMER  
PORT 0  
CONFIGURABLE I/Os  
2
FAST/STANDARD I C  
CRYSTAL OR  
RESONATOR  
OSCILLATOR  
2
1
FAST I C  
su01735  
2
1. 2nd I C on P8xC661X2 only.  
4
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
BLOCK DIAGRAM (CPU-ORIENTED)  
P0.0–P0.7  
P2.0–P2.7  
PORT 0  
DRIVERS  
PORT 2  
DRIVERS  
V
V
CC  
SS  
OTP  
MEMORY  
RAM ADDR  
REGISTER  
PORT 0  
LATCH  
PORT 2  
LATCH  
RAM  
8
B
STACK  
POINTER  
ACC  
REGISTER  
PROGRAM  
ADDRESS  
REGISTER  
TMP1  
TMP2  
BUFFER  
ALU  
SFRs  
TIMERS  
P.C.A.  
PC  
INCRE-  
MENTER  
PSW  
8
16  
PROGRAM  
COUNTER  
PSEN  
ALE  
DPTR’S  
MULTIPLE  
TIMING  
AND  
CONTROL  
EAV  
PP  
RST  
SERIAL  
I C PORT  
SERIAL  
I C PORT  
SERIAL  
UART  
PORT  
PORT 1  
LATCH  
PORT 3  
LATCH  
PD  
2
2
OSCILLATOR  
PORT 1  
DRIVERS  
PORT 3  
DRIVERS  
XTAL1  
XTAL2  
P1.0–P1.7  
P3.0–P3.7  
SDA  
SCL  
SDA1  
SCL1  
TxD RxD  
SU01761  
5
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
LOGIC SYMBOL  
Plastic Quad Flat Pack  
44  
34  
V
V
SS  
CC  
XTAL1  
1
33  
ADDRESS AND  
DATA BUS  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
XTAL2  
RST  
11  
23  
T2  
T2EX  
CEX0  
CEX1  
CEX2  
SCL0  
SDA0  
SCL1  
SDA1  
EA/V  
PP  
12  
Pin Function  
22  
PSEN  
Pin Function  
1
2
3
4
Pin Function  
P1.5/CEX2  
P1.6/SCL0  
P1.7/SDA0  
RST  
16  
17  
V
1
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
P0.7/AD7  
P0.6/AD6  
P0.5/AD5  
P0.4/AD4  
P0.3/AD3  
P0.2/AD2  
P0.1/AD1  
P0.0/AD0  
SS  
ALE/PROG  
1
NIC (8xC660)/  
SCL1 (8xC661)  
RxD  
3
TxD  
INT0  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
P2.0/A8  
P2.1/A9  
P2.2/A10  
P2.3/A11  
P2.4/A12  
P2.5/A13  
P2.6/A14  
P2.7/A15  
PSEN  
5
6
P3.0/RxD  
2
INT1  
CEX3/T0  
CEX4/T1  
V
3
SS  
ADDRESS BUS  
SU01736  
7
8
9
P3.1/TxD  
P3.2/INT0  
P3.3/INT1  
P3.4/T0/CEX3  
P3.5/T1/CEX4  
P3.6/WR  
WR  
RD  
V
CC  
1
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
NIC (8xC660)/  
3
SDA1 (8xC661)  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
P1.0/T2  
P1.1/T2EX  
P1.2/ECI  
P1.3/CEX0  
P1.4/CEX1  
P3.7/RD  
XTAL2  
XTAL1  
ALE  
2
V
2
SS  
EA/V  
PP  
PINNING  
Plastic Leaded Chip Carrier  
SU01738  
1. No internal connection  
2. May be left open, but it is recommended to connect V 2 and  
SS  
V
SS  
3 to GND to improve EMC performance  
6
1
40  
3. P8xC661X2 devices only  
7
39  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
17  
29  
18  
Pin Function  
28  
Pin Function  
Pin Function  
1
1
NIC (8xC660)/  
SDA1 (8xC661)  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
P3.4/T0/CEX3  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
P2.6/A14  
P2.7/A15  
PSEN  
3
P3.5/T1/CEX4  
P3.6/WR  
P3.7/RD  
XTAL2  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
P1.0/T2  
P1.1/T2EX  
P1.2/ECI  
P1.3/CEX0  
P1.4/CEX1  
P1.5/CEX2  
P1.6/SCL0  
P1.7/SDA0  
RST  
ALE  
2
V
2
SS  
XTAL1  
EA/V  
PP  
V
1
1
P0.7/AD7  
P0.6/AD6  
P0.5/AD5  
P0.4/AD4  
P0.3/AD3  
P0.2/AD2  
P0.1/AD1  
P0.0/AD0  
SS  
NIC (8xC660)/  
3
SCL1 (8xC661)  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
P2.0/A8  
P2.1/A9  
P3.0/RxD  
2
P2.2/A10  
P2.3/A11  
P2.4/A12  
P2.5/A13  
V
3
SS  
P3.1/TxD  
P3.2/INT0  
P3.3/INT1  
V
CC  
SU01737  
1. No internal connection  
2. May be left open, but it is recommended to connect V 2 and  
SS  
V
SS  
3 to GND to improve EMC performance  
3. P8xC661X2 devices only, these pins are open-drain and have  
the same electrical characteristics as P1.6 and P1.7  
6
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
PIN DESCRIPTIONS  
PIN NUMBER  
MNEMONIC  
TYPE  
NAME AND FUNCTION  
PLCC  
22  
LQFP  
16  
V
I
I
I
I
Ground: 0 V reference.  
SS1  
SS2  
SS3  
CC  
V
V
V
34  
28  
Ground: Additional ground pin (may be left open).  
Ground: Additional ground pin (may be left open).  
12  
6
44  
38  
Power Supply: This is the power supply voltage for normal, idle, and power-down  
operation.  
2
P0.0–0.7  
43–36  
2–9  
37–30  
I/O  
Port 0: Port 0 is an open-drain, bidirectional I/O port. Port 0 pins that have 1s  
written to them float and can be used as high-impedance inputs. Port 0 is also the  
multiplexed low-order address and data bus during accesses to external program  
and data memory. In this application, it uses strong internal pull-ups when emitting 1s.  
2
P1.0–P1.7  
40–44,  
1–3  
I/O  
Port 1: Port 1 is an 8-bit bidirectional I/O port with internal pull-ups on all pins.  
Port 1 pins that have 1s written to them are pulled HIGH by the internal pull-ups and  
can be used as inputs. As inputs, port 1 pins that are externally pulled LOW will  
source current because of the internal pull-ups. (See DC Electrical Characteristics:  
I ).  
IL  
Alternate functions for P8xC660X2/661X2 Port 1 include:  
2
40  
I/O  
T2 (P1.0): Timer/Counter 2 external count input/Clockout (see Programmable  
Clock-Out)  
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
41  
42  
43  
44  
1
I
T2EX (P1.1): Timer/Counter 2 Reload/Capture/Direction Control  
ECI (P1.2): External Clock Input to the PCA  
I
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
CEX0 (P1.3): Capture/Compare External I/O for PCA module 0  
CEX1 (P1.4): Capture/Compare External I/O for PCA module 1  
CEX2 (P1.5): Capture/Compare External I/O for PCA module 2  
2
2
SCL (P1.6): I C bus clock line (open drain)  
2
3
SCL (P1.7): I C bus data line (open drain)  
2
P2.0–P2.7  
24–31  
18–25  
I/O  
Port 2: Port 2 is an 8-bit bidirectional I/O port with internal pull-ups. Port 2 pins that  
have 1s written to them are pulled HIGH by the internal pull-ups and can be used  
as inputs. As inputs, port 2 pins that are externally being pulled LOW will source  
current because of the internal pull-ups. (See DC Electrical Characteristics: I ).  
IL  
Port 2 emits the high-order address byte during fetches from external program  
memory and during accesses to external data memory that use 16-bit addresses  
(MOVX @DPTR). In this application, it uses strong internal pull-ups when emitting  
1s. During accesses to external data memory that use 8-bit addresses (MOV @Ri),  
port 2 emits the contents of the P2 special function register.  
2
P3.0–P3.7  
11,  
13–19  
5, 7–13  
I/O  
Port 3: Port 3 is an 8-bit bidirectional I/O port with internal pull-ups. Port 3 pins that  
have 1s written to them are pulled HIGH by the internal pull-ups and can be used  
as inputs. As inputs, port 3 pins that are externally being pulled LOW will source  
current because of the pull-ups. (See DC Electrical Characteristics: I ). Port 3 also  
IL  
serves the special features of the P8xC660X2/661X2, as listed below:  
11  
13  
14  
15  
16  
5
7
I
O
I
RxD (P3.0): Serial input port  
TxD (P3.1): Serial output port  
8
INT0 (P3.2): External interrupt 0  
9
I
INT1 (P3.3): External interrupt 1  
10  
I
CEX3/T0 (P3.4): Timer 0 external input; capture/compare external I/O for PCA  
module 3  
17  
11  
I
CEX4/T1 (P3.5): Timer 1 external input; capture/compare external I/O for PCA  
module 4  
18  
19  
12  
13  
O
O
WR (P3.6): External data memory write strobe  
RD (P3.7): External data memory read strobe  
2
RST  
10  
4
I
Reset: A HIGH on this pin for two machine cycles while the oscillator is running,  
resets the device. An internal resistor to V permits a power-on reset using only  
SS  
an external capacitor to V  
.
CC  
2
SCL1  
SDA1  
23  
1
17  
39  
I/O  
I/O  
Second I C bus clock line (open drain) (P8xC661X2)  
2
Second I C bus data line (open drain) (P8xC661X2)  
7
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
PIN NUMBER  
MNEMONIC  
TYPE  
NAME AND FUNCTION  
PLCC  
LQFP  
2
ALE  
33  
27  
O
Address Latch Enable: Output pulse for latching the LOW byte of the address  
during an access to external memory. In normal operation, ALE is emitted twice  
every machine cycle, and can be used for external timing or clocking. Note that one  
ALE pulse is skipped during each access to external data memory. ALE can be  
disabled by setting SFR auxiliary.0. With this bit set, ALE will be active only during a  
MOVX instruction.  
2
PSEN  
32  
35  
26  
29  
O
I
Program Store Enable: The read strobe to external program memory. When  
executing code from the external program memory, PSEN is activated twice each  
machine cycle, except that two PSEN activations are skipped during each access  
to external data memory. PSEN is not activated during fetches from internal  
program memory.  
2
EA  
External Access Enable/Programming Supply Voltage: EA must be externally  
held LOW to enable the device to fetch code from external program memory  
locations. If EA is held HIGH, the device executes from internal program memory.  
The value on the EA pin is latched when RST is released and any subsequent  
changes have no effect. This pin also receives the programming supply voltage  
(V ) during programming.  
PP  
XTAL1  
21  
20  
15  
14  
I
Crystal 1: Input to the inverting oscillator amplifier and input to the internal clock  
generator circuits.  
XTAL2  
O
Crystal 2: Output from the inverting oscillator amplifier.  
NOTE:  
1. To avoid “latch-up” effect at power-on, the voltage on any pin (other than EA) must not be higher than V + 0.5 V or less than V – 0.5 V.  
CC  
SS  
2. The pins are designed for test mode also.  
8
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
SPECIAL FUNCTION REGISTERS  
DIRECT  
ADDRESS  
BIT ADDRESS, SYMBOL, OR ALTERNATIVE PORT FUNCTION  
RESET  
VALUE  
SYMBOL  
DESCRIPTION  
MSB  
E7  
LSB  
E0  
ACC*  
AUXR#  
AUXR1#  
B*  
Accumulator  
E0H  
8EH  
A2H  
F0H  
E6  
E5  
SRD  
E4  
E3  
FME  
GPS  
F3  
E2  
E1  
00H  
EXTRAM  
Auxiliary  
AO  
xxxx0x10B  
xxxx00x0B  
00H  
Auxiliary 1  
B register  
LPEP  
F4  
0
DPS  
F0  
F7  
F6  
F5  
F2  
F1  
CCAP0H# Module 0 Capture High  
CCAP1H# Module 1 Capture High  
CCAP2H# Module 2 Capture High  
CCAP3H# Module 3 Capture High  
CCAP4H# Module 4 Capture High  
CCAP0L# Module 0 Capture Low  
CCAP1L# Module 1 Capture Low  
CCAP2L# Module 2 Capture Low  
CCAP3L# Module 3 Capture Low  
CCAP4L# Module 4 Capture Low  
FAH  
FBH  
FCH  
FDH  
FEH  
EAH  
EBH  
ECH  
EDH  
EEH  
xxxxxxxxB  
xxxxxxxxB  
xxxxxxxxB  
xxxxxxxxB  
xxxxxxxxB  
xxxxxxxxB  
xxxxxxxxB  
xxxxxxxxB  
xxxxxxxxB  
xxxxxxxxB  
CCAPM0# Module 0 Mode  
CCAPM1# Module 1 Mode  
CCAPM2# Module 2 Mode  
CCAPM3# Module 3 Mode  
CCAPM4# Module 4 Mode  
C2H  
C3H  
C4H  
C5H  
C6H  
ECOM CAPP  
ECOM CAPP  
ECOM CAPP  
ECOM CAPP  
ECOM CAPP  
CAPN  
CAPN  
CAPN  
CAPN  
CAPN  
MAT  
MAT  
MAT  
MAT  
MAT  
TOG  
TOG  
TOG  
TOG  
TOG  
PWM  
PWM  
PWM  
PWM  
PWM  
ECCF  
ECCF  
ECCF  
ECCF  
ECCF  
x0000000B  
x0000000B  
x0000000B  
x0000000B  
x0000000B  
C7  
CF  
C6  
C5  
C4  
C3  
C2  
C1  
C0  
CCON*#  
CH#  
CL#  
PCA Counter Control  
PCA Counter High  
PCA Counter Low  
C0H  
F9H  
E9H  
CR  
CCF4  
CCF3  
CCF2  
CCF1  
CCF0  
00x00000B  
00H  
00H  
CMOD#  
CKCON  
PCA Counter Mode  
Clock control  
C1H  
8FH  
CIDL  
WDTE  
CPS1  
CPS0  
ECF  
X2  
00xxx000B  
xxxxxxx1B  
DPTR:  
DPH  
DPL  
Data Pointer (2 bytes)  
Data Pointer High  
Data Pointer Low  
83H  
82H  
00H  
00H  
AF  
EA  
AE  
EC  
AD  
ES1  
AC  
ES0  
AB  
ET1  
AA  
EX1  
A9  
ET0  
ES2  
B9  
A8  
EX0  
ET2  
B8  
00000000B  
xxxxxx00B  
IEN0*  
IEN1*  
Interrupt Enable 0  
Interrupt Enable 1  
A8H  
E8H  
BF  
BE  
BD  
BC  
BB  
BA  
IP*#  
Interrupt Priority  
B8H  
B7H  
PT2  
B7  
PPC  
B6  
PS1  
B5  
PS0  
B4  
PT1  
B3  
PX1  
B2  
PT0  
B1  
PX0  
B0  
00000000B  
00000000B  
IPH#  
Interrupt Priority High  
PT2H  
PPCH  
PS1H  
PS0H  
PT1H  
PX1H  
PT0H  
PX0H  
87  
AD7  
97  
86  
AD6  
96  
85  
AD5  
95  
84  
AD4  
94  
83  
AD3  
93  
82  
AD2  
92  
81  
AD1  
91  
80  
AD0  
90  
P0*  
Port 0  
Port 1  
Port 2  
80H  
90H  
A0H  
FFH  
FFH  
FFH  
P1*#  
P2*  
SDA  
A7  
SCL  
A6  
CEX2  
A5  
CEX1  
A4  
CEX0  
A3  
ECI  
A2  
T2EX  
A1  
T2  
A0  
AD15  
B7  
AD14  
B6  
AD13  
B5  
AD12  
B4  
AD11  
B3  
AD10  
B2  
AD9  
B1  
AD8  
B0  
*
SFRs are bit addressable.  
#
SFRs are modified from or added to the 80C51 SFRs.  
Reserved bits.  
1. Reset value depends on reset source.  
2. 8xC661X2 only.  
9
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
SPECIAL FUNCTION REGISTERS (Continued)  
BIT ADDRESS, SYMBOL, OR ALTERNATIVE PORT FUNCTION  
DIRECT  
ADDRESS  
RESET  
VALUE  
SYMBOL  
DESCRIPTION  
Port 3  
MSB  
LSB  
P3*  
B0H  
RD  
WR  
T1/  
T0/  
INT1  
INT0  
TxD  
RxD  
FFH  
CEX4  
CEX3  
1
PCON#  
Power Control  
87H  
SMOD1 SMOD0  
POF  
D4  
GF1  
D3  
GF0  
D2  
PD  
D1  
F1  
IDL  
D0  
P
00xx0000B  
000000x0B  
D7  
CY  
D6  
AC  
D5  
F0  
PSW  
Program Status Word  
D0H  
RS1  
RS0  
OV  
RCAP2H#  
RCAP2L#  
Timer 2 Capture High  
Timer 2 Capture Low  
CBH  
CAH  
A9H  
B9H  
00H  
00H  
00H  
00H  
SADDR# Slave Address  
SADEN# Slave Address Mask  
SBUF  
Serial Data Buffer  
99H  
xxxxxxxxB  
9F  
9E  
9D  
9C  
9B  
9A  
99  
TI  
98  
RI  
SM0/FE  
SCON*  
SP  
Serial Control  
Stack Pointer  
98H  
81H  
SM1  
SM2  
REN  
TB8  
RB8  
00H  
07H  
8F  
8E  
8D  
8C  
8B  
8A  
89  
88  
TCON*  
Timer Control  
88H  
TF1  
TR1  
TF0  
TR0  
IE1  
IT1  
IE0  
IT0  
00H  
CF  
TF2  
CE  
EXF2  
CD  
RCLK  
CC  
TCLK  
CB  
EXEN2  
CA  
TR2  
C9  
C8  
T2CON*  
Timer 2 Control  
C8H  
C9H  
C/T2  
T2OE  
CP/RL2 00H  
T2MOD# Timer 2 Mode Control  
DCEN  
xxxxxx00B  
TH0  
TH1  
TH2#  
TL0  
TL1  
TL2#  
Timer High 0  
Timer High 1  
Timer High 2  
Timer Low 0  
Timer Low 1  
Timer Low 2  
8CH  
8DH  
CDH  
8AH  
8BH  
CCH  
00H  
00H  
00H  
00H  
00H  
00H  
TMOD  
S1CON  
S1STA  
S1DAT  
S1ADR  
S2CON  
Timer Mode  
I2C Control  
I2C STATUS  
I2C DATA  
89H  
D8H  
D9H  
DAH  
DBH  
F8H  
F1H  
F2H  
F3H  
F4H  
E7H  
GATE  
CR2  
SC4  
C/T  
ENA1  
SC3  
M1  
STA  
SC2  
M0  
GATE  
SI  
C/T  
AA  
0
M1  
CR1  
0
M0  
CR0  
0
00H  
00H  
F8H  
00H  
00H  
00H  
F8H  
00H  
00H  
STO  
SC1  
SC0  
I2C ADDRESS  
GC  
CR0  
0
2
2
Second I C control  
CR2  
SC4  
ENA1  
STA  
SC2  
STO  
SC1  
SI  
AA  
0
CR1  
0
2
2
2
S2STA  
Second I C  
SC3  
SC0  
2
S2DAT  
S2ADR  
Second I C  
2
2
Second I C  
GC  
2
2
S2IST  
Second I C  
2
IP1  
Interrupt priority 1  
PS2  
00H  
00H  
2
IP1H  
F7H  
A6H  
PS2H  
WDTRST Watchdog Timer Reset  
*
SFRs are bit addressable.  
#
SFRs are modified from or added to the 80C51 SFRs.  
Reserved bits.  
1. Reset value depends on reset source.  
2. 8xC661X2 only.  
10  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
OX2, when programmed by a parallel programmer (6-clock mode),  
supersedes the X2 bit (CKCON.0). The CKCON register is shown  
below in Figure 1.  
CLOCK CONTROL REGISTER (CKCON)  
This device allows control of the 6-clock/12-clock mode by means of  
both an SFR bit (X2) and an OTP bit. The OTP clock control bit  
CKCON  
Address = 8Fh  
Reset Value = x0000000B  
Not Bit Addressable  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
X2  
BIT  
CKCON.7  
SYMBOL FUNCTION  
Reserved.  
Reserved.  
Reserved.  
Reserved.  
Reserved.  
Reserved.  
Reserved.  
CKCON.6  
CKCON.5  
CKCON.4  
CKCON.3  
CKCON.2  
CKCON.1  
CKCON.0 X2  
CPU clock; 1 = 6 clocks for each machine cycle, 0 = 12 clocks for each machine cycle  
SU01689  
Figure 1. Clock control (CKCON) register  
Also please note that the clock divider applies to the serial port for  
modes 0 & 2 (fixed baud rate modes). This is because modes 1 & 3  
(variable baud rate modes) use either Timer 1 or Timer 2.  
RESET  
A reset is accomplished by holding the RST pin HIGH for at least  
two machine cycles (12 oscillator periods in 6-clock mode, or  
24 oscillator periods in 12-clock mode), while the oscillator is running.  
To ensure a good power-on reset, the RST pin must be HIGH long  
enough to allow the oscillator time to start up (normally a few  
milliseconds) plus two machine cycles. At power-on, the voltage on  
Below is the truth table for the CPU clock mode.  
Table 1.  
OX2 clock mode bit  
(can only be set by  
parallel programmer)  
X2 bit  
(CKCON.0)  
CPU clock mode  
V
CC  
and RST must come up at the same time for a proper start-up.  
Ports 1, 2, and 3 will asynchronously be driven to their reset  
condition when a voltage above V (min.) is applied to RST.  
erased  
0
12-clock mode  
(default)  
IH1  
The value on the EA pin is latched when RST is deasserted and has  
no further effect.  
erased  
1
6-clock mode  
6-clock mode  
programmed  
X
11  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
LOW POWER MODES  
Stop Clock Mode  
Design Consideration  
The static design enables the clock speed to be reduced down to  
0 MHz (stopped). When the oscillator is stopped, the RAM and  
Special Function Registers retain their values. This mode allows  
step-by-step utilization and permits reduced system power  
consumption by lowering the clock frequency down to any value. For  
lowest power consumption the Power Down mode is suggested.  
When the idle mode is terminated by a hardware reset, the device  
normally resumes program execution, from where it left off, up to  
two machine cycles before the internal reset algorithm takes control.  
On-chip hardware inhibits access to internal RAM in this event, but  
access to the port pins is not inhibited. To eliminate the possibility of  
an unexpected write when Idle is terminated by reset, the instruction  
following the one that invokes Idle should not be one that writes to a  
port pin or to external memory.  
Idle Mode  
In the idle mode (see Table 2), the CPU puts itself to sleep while all  
of the on-chip peripherals stay active. The instruction to invoke the  
idle mode is the last instruction executed in the normal operating  
mode before the idle mode is activated. The CPU contents, the  
on-chip RAM, and all of the special function registers remain intact  
during this mode. The idle mode can be terminated either by any  
enabled interrupt (at which time the process is picked up at the  
interrupt service routine and continued), or by a hardware reset  
which starts the processor in the same manner as a power-on reset.  
ONCE Mode  
The ONCE (“On-Circuit Emulation”) Mode facilitates testing and  
debugging of systems without the device having to be removed from  
the circuit. The ONCE Mode is invoked by:  
1. Pull ALE LOW while the device is in reset and PSEN is HIGH;  
2. Hold ALE LOW as RST is deactivated.  
While the device is in ONCE Mode, the Port 0 pins go into a float  
state, and the other port pins and ALE and PSEN are weakly pulled  
HIGH. The oscillator circuit remains active. While the device is in  
this mode, an emulator or test CPU can be used to drive the circuit.  
Normal operation is restored when a normal reset is applied.  
Power-Down Mode  
To save even more power, a Power Down mode (see Table 2) can  
be invoked by software. In this mode, the oscillator is stopped and  
the instruction that invoked Power Down is the last instruction  
executed. The on-chip RAM and Special Function Registers retain  
Programmable Clock-Out  
A 50% duty cycle clock can be programmed to come out on P1.0.  
This pin, besides being a regular I/O pin, has two alternate  
functions. It can be programmed:  
their values down to 2 V and care must be taken to return V to the  
CC  
minimum specified operating voltages before the Power Down Mode  
is terminated.  
1. to input the external clock for Timer/Counter 2, or  
Either a hardware reset or external interrupt can be used to exit from  
Power Down. Reset redefines all the SFRs but does not change the  
on-chip RAM. An external interrupt allows both the SFRs and the  
on-chip RAM to retain their values.  
2. to output a 50% duty cycle clock ranging from 61 Hz to 4 MHz at a  
16 MHz operating frequency in 12-clock mode (122 Hz to 8 MHz in  
6-clock mode).  
To configure the Timer/Counter 2 as a clock generator, bit C/T2 (in  
T2CON) must be cleared and bit T20E in T2MOD must be set. Bit  
TR2 (T2CON.2) also must be set to start the timer.  
To properly terminate Power Down, the reset or external interrupt  
should not be executed before V is restored to its normal  
CC  
operating level and must be held active long enough for the  
oscillator to restart and stabilize (normally less than 10 ms).  
The Clock-Out frequency depends on the oscillator frequency and  
the reload value of Timer 2 capture registers (RCAP2H, RCAP2L)  
as shown in this equation:  
With an external interrupt, INT0 and INT1 must be enabled and  
configured as level-sensitive. Holding the pin LOW restarts the  
oscillator but bringing the pin back HIGH completes the exit. Once  
the interrupt is serviced, the next instruction to be executed after  
RETI will be the one following the instruction that put the device into  
Power Down.  
Oscillator Frequency  
n   (65536 * RCAP2H, RCAP2L)  
n =  
2 in 6-clock mode  
4 in 12-clock mode  
LPEP  
Where (RCAP2H,RCAP2L) = the content of RCAP2H and RCAP2L  
taken as a 16-bit unsigned integer.  
The EPROM array contains some analog circuits that are not  
required when V is less than 3.6 V but are required for a V  
greater than 3.6 V. The LPEP bit (AUXR.4), when set, will  
powerdown these analog circuits resulting in a reduced supply  
current. This bit should be set ONLY for applications that operate at  
CC  
CC  
In the Clock-Out mode Timer 2 roll-overs will not generate an  
interrupt. This is similar to when it is used as a baud-rate generator.  
It is possible to use Timer 2 as a baud-rate generator and a clock  
generator simultaneously. Note, however, that the baud-rate and the  
Clock-Out frequency will be the same.  
a V less than 4 V.  
CC  
POWER-ON FLAG  
The Power-On Flag (POF) is set by on-chip circuitry when the V  
CC  
level on the P8xC66xX2 rises from 0 to 5 V. The POF bit can be set  
or cleared by software allowing a user to determine if the reset is the  
result of a power-on or a warm start after powerdown. The V level  
CC  
must remain above 3 V for the POF to remain unaffected by the V  
level.  
CC  
12  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
Table 2. External Pin Status During Idle and Power-Down Mode  
MODE  
PROGRAM MEMORY  
Internal  
ALE  
PSEN  
PORT 0  
Data  
PORT 1  
Data  
PORT 2  
Data  
PORT 3  
Data  
Idle  
Idle  
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
External  
Float  
Data  
Address  
Data  
Data  
Power-down  
Power-down  
Internal  
Data  
Data  
Data  
External  
Float  
Data  
Data  
Data  
Mode 1  
TIMER 0 AND TIMER 1 OPERATION  
Timer 0 and Timer 1  
Mode 1 is the same as Mode 0, except that the Timer register is  
being run with all 16 bits.  
The “Timer” or “Counter” function is selected by control bits C/T in  
the Special Function Register TMOD. These two Timer/Counters  
have four operating modes, which are selected by bit-pairs (M1, M0)  
in TMOD. Modes 0, 1, and 2 are the same for both Timers/Counters.  
Mode 3 is different. The four operating modes are described in the  
following text.  
Mode 2  
Mode 2 configures the Timer register as an 8-bit Counter (TLn) with  
automatic reload, as shown in Figure 5. Overflow from TLn not only  
sets TFn, but also reloads TLn with the contents of THn, which is  
preset by software. The reload leaves THn unchanged.  
Mode 2 operation is the same for Timer 0 as for Timer 1.  
Mode 0  
Putting either Timer into Mode 0 makes it look like an 8048 Timer,  
which is an 8-bit Counter with a divide-by-32 prescaler. Figure 3  
shows the Mode 0 operation.  
Mode 3  
Timer 1 in Mode 3 simply holds its count. The effect is the same as  
setting TR1 = 0.  
In this mode, the Timer register is configured as a 13-bit register. As  
the count rolls over from all 1s to all 0s, it sets the Timer interrupt  
flag TFn. The counted input is enabled to the Timer when TRn = 1  
and either GATE = 0 or INTn = 1. (Setting GATE = 1 allows the  
Timer to be controlled by external input INTn, to facilitate pulse width  
measurements). TRn is a control bit in the Special Function Register  
TCON (Figure 4).  
Timer 0 in Mode 3 establishes TL0 and TH0 as two separate  
counters. The logic for Mode 3 on Timer 0 is shown in Figure 6. TL0  
uses the Timer 0 control bits: C/T, GATE, TR0, and TF0 as well as  
pin INT0. TH0 is locked into a timer function (counting machine  
cycles) and takes over the use of TR1 and TF1 from Timer 1. Thus,  
TH0 now controls the “Timer 1” interrupt.  
Mode 3 is provided for applications requiring an extra 8-bit timer on  
the counter. With Timer 0 in Mode 3, an 80C51 can look like it has  
three Timer/Counters. When Timer 0 is in Mode 3, Timer 1 can be  
turned on and off by switching it out of and into its own Mode 3, or  
can still be used by the serial port as a baud rate generator, or in  
fact, in any application not requiring an interrupt.  
The 13-bit register consists of all 8 bits of THn and the lower 5 bits  
of TLn. The upper 3 bits of TLn are indeterminate and should be  
ignored. Setting the run flag (TRn) does not clear the registers.  
Mode 0 operation is the same for Timer 0 as for Timer 1. There are  
two different GATE bits, one for Timer 1 (TMOD.7) and one for Timer  
0 (TMOD.3).  
13  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
TMOD  
Address = 89H  
Reset Value = 00H  
Not Bit Addressable  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
GATE C/T  
M1  
M0 GATE  
C/T  
M1  
M0  
TIMER 1  
TIMER 0  
BIT  
SYMBOL FUNCTION  
TMOD.3/ GATE  
TMOD.7  
Gating control when set. Timer/Counter “n” is enabled only while “INTn” pin is high and  
“TRn” control pin is set. when cleared Timer “n” is enabled whenever “TRn” control bit is set.  
TMOD.2/ C/T  
TMOD.6  
Timer or Counter Selector cleared for Timer operation (input from internal system clock.)  
Set for Counter operation (input from “Tn” input pin).  
M1 M0  
OPERATING  
0
0
1
0
1
0
8048 Timer: “TLn” serves as 5-bit prescaler.  
16-bit Timer/Counter: “THn” and “TLn” are cascaded; there is no prescaler.  
8-bit auto-reload Timer/Counter: “THn” holds a value which is to be reloaded  
into “TLn” each time it overflows.  
1
1
1
1
(Timer 0) TL0 is an 8-bit Timer/Counter controlled by the standard Timer 0 control bits.  
TH0 is an 8-bit timer only controlled by Timer 1 control bits.  
(Timer 1) Timer/Counter 1 stopped.  
SU01580  
Figure 2. Timer/Counter 0/1 Mode Control (TMOD) Register  
OSC  
÷ d*  
C/T = 0  
TLn  
THn  
TFn  
Interrupt  
(5 Bits)  
(8 Bits)  
C/T = 1  
Control  
Tn Pin  
TRn  
Timer n  
Gate bit  
INTn Pin  
*d = 6 in 6-clock mode; d = 12 in 12-clock mode.  
SU01618  
Figure 3. Timer/Counter 0/1 Mode 0: 13-Bit Timer/Counter  
14  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
TCON  
Address = 88H  
Bit Addressable  
Reset Value = 00H  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TF1  
TR1  
TF0  
TR0  
IE1  
IT1  
IE0  
IT0  
BIT  
SYMBOL FUNCTION  
TCON.7  
TF1  
Timer 1 overflow flag. Set by hardware on Timer/Counter overflow.  
Cleared by hardware when processor vectors to interrupt routine, or clearing the bit in software.  
TCON.6  
TCON.5  
TR1  
TF0  
Timer 1 Run control bit. Set/cleared by software to turn Timer/Counter on/off.  
Timer 0 overflow flag. Set by hardware on Timer/Counter overflow.  
Cleared by hardware when processor vectors to interrupt routine, or by clearing the bit in software.  
TCON.4  
TCON.3  
TR0  
IE1  
Timer 0 Run control bit. Set/cleared by software to turn Timer/Counter on/off.  
Interrupt 1 Edge flag. Set by hardware when external interrupt edge detected.  
Cleared when interrupt processed.  
TCON.2  
TCON.1  
TCON.0  
IT1  
IE0  
IT0  
Interrupt 1 type control bit. Set/cleared by software to specify falling edge/low level triggered  
external interrupts.  
Interrupt 0 Edge flag. Set by hardware when external interrupt edge detected.  
Cleared when interrupt processed.  
Interrupt 0 Type control bit. Set/cleared by software to specify falling edge/low level  
triggered external interrupts.  
SU01516  
Figure 4. Timer/Counter 0/1 Control (TCON) Register  
OSC  
÷ d*  
C/T = 0  
TLn  
TFn  
Interrupt  
(8 Bits)  
C/T = 1  
Control  
Tn Pin  
Reload  
TRn  
Timer n  
Gate bit  
THn  
(8 Bits)  
INTn Pin  
SU01619  
*d = 6 in 6-clock mode; d = 12 in 12-clock mode.  
Figure 5. Timer/Counter 0/1 Mode 2: 8-Bit Auto-Reload  
15  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
OSC  
÷ d*  
C/T = 0  
C/T = 1  
TL0  
(8 Bits)  
TF0  
Interrupt  
Control  
T0 Pin  
TR0  
Timer 0  
Gate bit  
INT0 Pin  
TH0  
(8 Bits)  
TF1  
Interrupt  
OSC  
÷ d*  
Control  
TR1  
*d = 6 in 6-clock mode; d = 12 in 12-clock mode.  
SU01620  
Figure 6. Timer/Counter 0 Mode 3: Two 8-Bit Counters  
16  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
Counter Enable) which is located in the T2MOD register (see  
Figure 3). When reset is applied the DCEN=0 which means Timer 2  
will default to counting up. If DCEN bit is set, Timer 2 can count up  
or down depending on the value of the T2EX pin.  
TIMER 2 OPERATION  
Timer 2  
Timer 2 is a 16-bit Timer/Counter which can operate as either an  
event timer or an event counter, as selected by C/T2 in the special  
function register T2CON (see Figure 1). Timer 2 has three operating  
modes: Capture, Auto-reload (up or down counting), and Baud Rate  
Generator, which are selected by bits in the T2CON as shown in  
Table 3.  
Figure 4 shows Timer 2 which will count up automatically since  
DCEN=0. In this mode there are two options selected by bit EXEN2  
in T2CON register. If EXEN2=0, then Timer 2 counts up to 0FFFFH  
and sets the TF2 (Overflow Flag) bit upon overflow. This causes the  
Timer 2 registers to be reloaded with the 16-bit value in RCAP2L  
and RCAP2H. The values in RCAP2L and RCAP2H are preset by  
software means.  
Capture Mode  
In the capture mode there are two options which are selected by bit  
EXEN2 in T2CON. If EXEN2=0, then timer 2 is a 16-bit timer or  
counter (as selected by C/T2 in T2CON) which, upon overflowing  
sets bit TF2, the timer 2 overflow bit. This bit can be used to  
generate an interrupt (by enabling the Timer 2 interrupt bit in the  
IE register). If EXEN2= 1, Timer 2 operates as described above, but  
with the added feature that a 1- to -0 transition at external input  
T2EX causes the current value in the Timer 2 registers, TL2 and  
TH2, to be captured into registers RCAP2L and RCAP2H,  
respectively. In addition, the transition at T2EX causes bit EXF2 in  
T2CON to be set, and EXF2 like TF2 can generate an interrupt  
(which vectors to the same location as Timer 2 overflow interrupt.  
The Timer 2 interrupt service routine can interrogate TF2 and EXF2  
to determine which event caused the interrupt). The capture mode is  
illustrated in Figure 2 (There is no reload value for TL2 and TH2 in  
this mode. Even when a capture event occurs from T2EX, the  
counter keeps on counting T2EX pin transitions or osc/6 pulses  
(osc/12 in 12-clock mode).).  
If EXEN2=1, then a 16-bit reload can be triggered either by an  
overflow or by a 1-to-0 transition at input T2EX. This transition also  
sets the EXF2 bit. The Timer 2 interrupt, if enabled, can be  
generated when either TF2 or EXF2 are 1.  
In Figure 5 DCEN=1 which enables Timer 2 to count up or down.  
This mode allows pin T2EX to control the direction of count. When a  
logic 1 is applied at pin T2EX Timer 2 will count up. Timer 2 will  
overflow at 0FFFFH and set the TF2 flag, which can then generate  
an interrupt, if the interrupt is enabled. This timer overflow also  
causes the 16-bit value in RCAP2L and RCAP2H to be reloaded  
into the timer registers TL2 and TH2.  
When a logic 0 is applied at pin T2EX this causes Timer 2 to count  
down. The timer will underflow when TL2 and TH2 become equal to  
the value stored in RCAP2L and RCAP2H. Timer 2 underflow sets  
the TF2 flag and causes 0FFFFH to be reloaded into the timer  
registers TL2 and TH2.  
Auto-Reload Mode (Up or Down Counter)  
The external flag EXF2 toggles when Timer 2 underflows or overflows.  
This EXF2 bit can be used as a 17th bit of resolution if needed. The  
EXF2 flag does not generate an interrupt in this mode of operation.  
In the 16-bit auto-reload mode, Timer 2 can be configured (as either  
a timer or counter [C/T2 in T2CON]) then programmed to count up  
or down. The counting direction is determined by bit DCEN (Down  
(MSB)  
(LSB)  
TF2  
EXF2  
RCLK  
TCLK  
EXEN2  
TR2  
C/T2  
CP/RL2  
Symbol  
Position  
Name and Significance  
TF2  
T2CON.7  
T2CON.6  
Timer 2 overflow flag set by a Timer 2 overflow and must be cleared by software. TF2 will not be set  
when either RCLK or TCLK = 1.  
EXF2  
Timer 2 external flag set when either a capture or reload is caused by a negative transition on T2EX and  
EXEN2 = 1. When Timer 2 interrupt is enabled, EXF2 = 1 will cause the CPU to vector to the Timer 2  
interrupt routine. EXF2 must be cleared by software. EXF2 does not cause an interrupt in up/down  
counter mode (DCEN = 1).  
RCLK  
TCLK  
T2CON.5  
T2CON.4  
T2CON.3  
Receive clock flag. When set, causes the serial port to use Timer 2 overflow pulses for its receive clock  
in modes 1 and 3. RCLK = 0 causes Timer 1 overflow to be used for the receive clock.  
Transmit clock flag. When set, causes the serial port to use Timer 2 overflow pulses for its transmit clock  
in modes 1 and 3. TCLK = 0 causes Timer 1 overflows to be used for the transmit clock.  
EXEN2  
Timer 2 external enable flag. When set, allows a capture or reload to occur as a result of a negative  
transition on T2EX if Timer 2 is not being used to clock the serial port. EXEN2 = 0 causes Timer 2 to  
ignore events at T2EX.  
TR2  
T2CON.2  
T2CON.1  
Start/stop control for Timer 2. A logic 1 starts the timer.  
C/T2  
Timer or counter select. (Timer 2)  
0 = Internal timer (OSC/6 in 6-clock mode or OSC/12 in 12-clock mode)  
1 = External event counter (falling edge triggered).  
CP/RL2  
T2CON.0  
Capture/Reload flag. When set, captures will occur on negative transitions at T2EX if EXEN2 = 1. When  
cleared, auto-reloads will occur either with Timer 2 overflows or negative transitions at T2EX when  
EXEN2 = 1. When either RCLK = 1 or TCLK = 1, this bit is ignored and the timer is forced to auto-reload  
on Timer 2 overflow.  
SU01251  
Figure 1. Timer/Counter 2 (T2CON) Control Register  
17  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
Table 3. Timer 2 Operating Modes  
RCLK + TCLK  
CP/RL2  
TR2  
1
MODE  
0
0
1
X
0
1
16-bit Auto-reload  
16-bit Capture  
Baud rate generator  
(off)  
1
X
X
1
0
OSC  
÷ n*  
C/T2 = 0  
TL2  
(8 BITS)  
TH2  
(8 BITS)  
TF2  
C/T2 = 1  
T2 Pin  
Control  
TR2  
Capture  
Transition  
Detector  
Timer 2  
Interrupt  
RCAP2L  
RCAP2H  
T2EX Pin  
EXF2  
Control  
EXEN2  
SU01252  
* n = 6 in 6-clock mode, or 12 in 12-clock mode.  
Figure 2. Timer 2 in Capture Mode  
T2MOD  
Address = 0C9H  
Not Bit Addressable  
Reset Value = XXXX XX00B  
6
5
4
3
2
T2OE  
1
DCEN  
0
Bit  
7
Symbol  
Function  
Not implemented, reserved for future use.*  
Timer 2 Output Enable bit.  
T2OE  
DCEN  
Down Count Enable bit. When set, this allows Timer 2 to be configured as an up/down counter.  
*
User software should not write 1s to reserved bits. These bits may be used in future 8051 family products to invoke new features.  
In that case, the reset or inactive value of the new bit will be 0, and its active value will be 1. The value read from a reserved bit is  
indeterminate.  
SU00729  
Figure 3. Timer 2 Mode (T2MOD) Control Register  
18  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
OSC  
÷ n*  
C/T2 = 0  
C/T2 = 1  
TL2  
(8 BITS)  
TH2  
(8 BITS)  
T2 PIN  
CONTROL  
TR2  
RELOAD  
TRANSITION  
DETECTOR  
RCAP2L  
RCAP2H  
TF2  
TIMER 2  
INTERRUPT  
T2EX PIN  
EXF2  
CONTROL  
EXEN2  
SU01253  
* n = 6 in 6-clock mode, or 12 in 12-clock mode.  
Figure 4. Timer 2 in Auto-Reload Mode (DCEN = 0)  
(DOWN COUNTING RELOAD VALUE)  
FFH  
FFH  
TOGGLE  
EXF2  
÷ n*  
OSC  
C/T2 = 0  
C/T2 = 1  
OVERFLOW  
TL2  
TH2  
TF2  
INTERRUPT  
T2 PIN  
CONTROL  
TR2  
COUNT  
DIRECTION  
1 = UP  
0 = DOWN  
RCAP2L  
RCAP2H  
(UP COUNTING RELOAD VALUE)  
T2EX PIN  
* n = 6 in 6-clock mode, or 12 in 12-clock mode.  
SU01254  
Figure 5. Timer 2 Auto Reload Mode (DCEN = 1)  
19  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
Timer 1  
Overflow  
n = 1 in 6-clock mode  
n = 2 in 12-clock mode  
÷ 2  
“0”  
“0”  
“1”  
OSC  
÷ n  
C/T2 = 0  
C/T2 = 1  
SMOD  
RCLK  
“1”  
TL2  
(8-bits)  
TH2  
(8-bits)  
T2 Pin  
Control  
RX Clock  
÷ 16  
÷ 16  
“1”  
“0”  
TR2  
Reload  
TCLK  
Transition  
Detector  
RCAP2L  
RCAP2H  
TX Clock  
Timer 2  
Interrupt  
T2EX Pin  
EXF2  
Control  
EXEN2  
Note availability of additional external interrupt.  
SU01629  
Figure 6. Timer 2 in Baud Rate Generator Mode  
The baud rates in modes 1 and 3 are determined by Timer 2’s  
overflow rate given below:  
Table 4. Timer 2 Generated Commonly Used  
Baud Rates  
Timer 2 Overflow Rate  
Modes 1 and 3 Baud Rates +  
Baud Rate  
Timer 2  
16  
Osc Freq  
12-clock  
mode  
6-clock  
mode  
The timer can be configured for either “timer” or “counter” operation.  
In many applications, it is configured for “timer” operation (C/T2=0).  
Timer operation is different for Timer 2 when it is being used as a  
baud rate generator.  
RCAP2H  
RCAP2L  
375 k  
9.6 k  
4.8 k  
2.4 k  
1.2 k  
300  
110  
300  
110  
750 k  
19.2 k  
9.6 k  
4.8 k  
2.4 k  
600  
220  
600  
220  
12 MHz  
12 MHz  
12 MHz  
12 MHz  
12 MHz  
12 MHz  
12 MHz  
6 MHz  
FF  
FF  
FF  
FF  
FE  
FB  
F2  
FD  
F9  
FF  
D9  
B2  
64  
C8  
1E  
AF  
8F  
57  
Usually, as a timer it would increment every machine cycle (i.e.,  
1
1
/ the oscillator frequency in 6-clock mode, / the oscillator  
6
12  
frequency in 12-clock mode). As a baud rate generator, it  
OSC  
increments at the oscillator frequency in 6-clock mode (  
12-clock mode). Thus the baud rate formula is as follows:  
/ in  
2
Modes 1 and 3 Baud Rates =  
Oscillator Frequency  
6 MHz  
[ n *   [65536 * (RCAP2H, RCAP2L)]]  
* n =  
16 in 6-clock mode  
32 in 12-clock mode  
Baud Rate Generator Mode  
Bits TCLK and/or RCLK in T2CON (Table 4) allow the serial port  
transmit and receive baud rates to be derived from either Timer 1 or  
Timer 2. When TCLK= 0, Timer 1 is used as the serial port transmit  
baud rate generator. When TCLK= 1, Timer 2 is used as the serial  
port transmit baud rate generator. RCLK has the same effect for the  
serial port receive baud rate. With these two bits, the serial port can  
have different receive and transmit baud rates – one generated by  
Timer 1, the other by Timer 2.  
Where: (RCAP2H, RCAP2L)= The content of RCAP2H and  
RCAP2L taken as a 16-bit unsigned integer.  
The Timer 2 as a baud rate generator mode shown in Figure 6, is  
valid only if RCLK and/or TCLK = 1 in T2CON register. Note that a  
rollover in TH2 does not set TF2, and will not generate an interrupt.  
Thus, the Timer 2 interrupt does not have to be disabled when  
Timer 2 is in the baud rate generator mode. Also if the EXEN2  
(T2 external enable flag) is set, a 1-to-0 transition in T2EX  
(Timer/counter 2 trigger input) will set EXF2 (T2 external flag) but  
will not cause a reload from (RCAP2H, RCAP2L) to (TH2,TL2).  
Therefore when Timer 2 is in use as a baud rate generator, T2EX  
can be used as an additional external interrupt, if needed.  
Figure 6 shows the Timer 2 in baud rate generation mode. The baud  
rate generation mode is like the auto-reload mode,in that a rollover in  
TH2 causes the Timer 2 registers to be reloaded with the 16-bit value  
in registers RCAP2H and RCAP2L, which are preset by software.  
20  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
When Timer 2 is in the baud rate generator mode, one should not try  
to read or write TH2 and TL2. As a baud rate generator, Timer 2 is  
incremented every state time (osc/2) or asynchronously from pin T2;  
under these conditions, a read or write of TH2 or TL2 may not be  
accurate. The RCAP2 registers may be read, but should not be  
written to, because a write might overlap a reload and cause write  
and/or reload errors. The timer should be turned off (clear TR2)  
before accessing the Timer 2 or RCAP2 registers.  
If Timer 2 is being clocked internally, the baud rate is:  
fOSC  
Baud Rate +  
[ n *   [65536 * (RCAP2H, RCAP2L)]]  
* n =  
16 in 6-clock mode  
32 in 12-clock mode  
Where f  
= Oscillator Frequency  
OSC  
To obtain the reload value for RCAP2H and RCAP2L, the above  
equation can be rewritten as:  
Table 4 shows commonly used baud rates and how they can be  
obtained from Timer 2.  
fOSC  
RCAP2H, RCAP2L + 65536 * ǒ  
Ǔ
Summary of Baud Rate Equations  
Timer 2 is in baud rate generating mode. If Timer 2 is being clocked  
through pin T2 (P1.0) the baud rate is:  
n *   Baud Rate  
Timer/Counter 2 Set-up  
Timer 2 Overflow Rate  
Except for the baud rate generator mode, the values given for T2CON  
do not include the setting of the TR2 bit. Therefore, bit TR2 must be  
set, separately, to turn the timer on. see Table 5 for set-up of Timer 2  
as a timer. Also see Table 6 for set-up of Timer 2 as a counter.  
Baud Rate +  
16  
Table 5. Timer 2 as a Timer  
T2CON  
MODE  
INTERNAL CONTROL  
(Note 1)  
EXTERNAL CONTROL  
(Note 2)  
16-bit Auto-Reload  
00H  
01H  
34H  
24H  
14H  
08H  
09H  
36H  
26H  
16H  
16-bit Capture  
Baud rate generator receive and transmit same baud rate  
Receive only  
Transmit only  
Table 6. Timer 2 as a Counter  
TMOD  
MODE  
INTERNAL CONTROL  
(Note 1)  
EXTERNAL CONTROL  
(Note 2)  
16-bit  
02H  
03H  
0AH  
0BH  
Auto-Reload  
NOTES:  
1. Capture/reload occurs only on timer/counter overflow.  
2. Capture/reload occurs on timer/counter overflow and a 1-to-0 transition on T2EX (P1.1) pin except when Timer 2 is used in the baud rate  
generator mode.  
21  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
The slaves that weren’t being addressed leave their SM2s set and  
go on about their business, ignoring the coming data bytes.  
FULL-DUPLEX ENHANCED UART  
Standard UART operation  
SM2 has no effect in Mode 0, and in Mode 1 can be used to check  
the validity of the stop bit. In a Mode 1 reception, if SM2 = 1, the  
receive interrupt will not be activated unless a valid stop bit is  
received.  
The serial port is full duplex, meaning it can transmit and receive  
simultaneously. It is also receive-buffered, meaning it can  
commence reception of a second byte before a previously received  
byte has been read from the register. (However, if the first byte still  
hasn’t been read by the time reception of the second byte is  
complete, one of the bytes will be lost.) The serial port receive and  
transmit registers are both accessed at Special Function Register  
SBUF. Writing to SBUF loads the transmit register, and reading  
SBUF accesses a physically separate receive register.  
Serial Port Control Register  
The serial port control and status register is the Special Function  
Register SCON, shown in Figure 7. This register contains not only  
the mode selection bits, but also the 9th data bit for transmit and  
receive (TB8 and RB8), and the serial port interrupt bits (TI and RI).  
The serial port can operate in 4 modes:  
Baud Rates  
The baud rate in Mode 0 is fixed: Mode 0 Baud Rate = Oscillator  
Frequency / 12 (12-clock mode) or / 6 (6-clock mode). The baud  
rate in Mode 2 depends on the value of bit SMOD in Special  
Function Register PCON. If SMOD = 0 (which is the value on reset),  
and the port pins in 12-clock mode, the baud rate is 1/64 the  
oscillator frequency. If SMOD = 1, the baud rate is 1/32 the oscillator  
frequency. In 6-clock mode, the baud rate is 1/32 or 1/16 the  
oscillator frequency, respectively.  
Mode 0: Serial data enters and exits through RxD. TxD outputs  
the shift clock. 8 bits are transmitted/received (LSB first).  
The baud rate is fixed at 1/12 the oscillator frequency in  
12-clock mode or 1/6 the oscillator frequency in 6-clock  
mode.  
Mode 1: 10 bits are transmitted (through TxD) or received  
(through RxD): a start bit (0), 8 data bits (LSB first), and  
a stop bit (1). On receive, the stop bit goes into RB8 in  
Special Function Register SCON. The baud rate is  
variable.  
Mode 2 Baud Rate =  
2SMOD  
n
  (Oscillator Frequency)  
Mode 2: 11 bits are transmitted (through TxD) or received  
(through RxD): start bit (0), 8 data bits (LSB first), a  
programmable 9th data bit, and a stop bit (1). On  
Transmit, the 9th data bit (TB8 in SCON) can be  
assigned the value of 0 or 1. Or, for example, the parity  
bit (P, in the PSW) could be moved into TB8. On receive,  
the 9th data bit goes into RB8 in Special Function  
Register SCON, while the stop bit is ignored. The baud  
rate is programmable to either 1/32 or 1/64 the oscillator  
frequency in 12-clock mode or 1/16 or 1/32 the oscillator  
frequency in 6-clock mode.  
Where:  
n = 64 in 12-clock mode, 32 in 6-clock mode  
The baud rates in Modes 1 and 3 are determined by the Timer 1 or  
Timer 2 overflow rate.  
Using Timer 1 to Generate Baud Rates  
When Timer 1 is used as the baud rate generator (T2CON.RCLK  
= 0, T2CON.TCLK = 0), the baud rates in Modes 1 and 3 are  
determined by the Timer 1 overflow rate and the value of SMOD as  
follows:  
Mode 3: 11 bits are transmitted (through TxD) or received  
(through RxD): a start bit (0), 8 data bits (LSB first), a  
programmable 9th data bit, and a stop bit (1). In fact,  
Mode 3 is the same as Mode 2 in all respects except  
baud rate. The baud rate in Mode 3 is variable.  
Mode 1, 3 Baud Rate =  
2SMOD  
n
  (Timer 1 Overflow Rate)  
Where:  
In all four modes, transmission is initiated by any instruction that  
uses SBUF as a destination register. Reception is initiated in Mode 0  
by the condition RI = 0 and REN = 1. Reception is initiated in the  
other modes by the incoming start bit if REN = 1.  
n = 32 in 12-clock mode, 16 in 6-clock mode  
The Timer 1 interrupt should be disabled in this application. The  
Timer itself can be configured for either “timer” or “counter”  
operation, and in any of its 3 running modes. In the most typical  
applications, it is configured for “timer” operation, in the auto-reload  
mode (high nibble of TMOD = 0010B). In that case the baud rate is  
given by the formula:  
Multiprocessor Communications  
Modes 2 and 3 have a special provision for multiprocessor  
communications. In these modes, 9 data bits are received. The 9th  
one goes into RB8. Then comes a stop bit. The port can be  
programmed such that when the stop bit is received, the serial port  
interrupt will be activated only if RB8 = 1. This feature is enabled by  
setting bit SM2 in SCON. A way to use this feature in multiprocessor  
systems is as follows:  
Mode 1, 3 Baud Rate =  
2SMOD  
n
Oscillator Frequency  
12   [256–(TH1)]  
 
Where:  
When the master processor wants to transmit a block of data to one  
of several slaves, it first sends out an address byte which identifies  
the target slave. An address byte differs from a data byte in that the  
9th bit is 1 in an address byte and 0 in a data byte. With SM2 = 1, no  
slave will be interrupted by a data byte. An address byte, however,  
will interrupt all slaves, so that each slave can examine the received  
byte and see if it is being addressed. The addressed slave will clear  
its SM2 bit and prepare to receive the data bytes that will be coming.  
n = 32 in 12-clock mode, 16 in 6-clock mode  
One can achieve very low baud rates with Timer 1 by leaving the  
Timer 1 interrupt enabled, and configuring the Timer to run as a  
16-bit timer (high nibble of TMOD = 0001B), and using the Timer 1  
interrupt to do a 16-bit software reload. Figure 8 lists various  
commonly used baud rates and how they can be obtained from  
Timer 1.  
22  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
SCON  
Address = 98H  
Bit Addressable  
Reset Value = 00H  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SM0 SM1 SM2 REN TB8  
RB8  
TI  
RI  
Where SM0, SM1 specify the serial port mode, as follows:  
SM0 SM1 Mode Description Baud Rate  
/12 (12-clock mode) or f  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
2
3
shift register  
8-bit UART  
9-bit UART  
9-bit UART  
f
/6 (6-clock mode)  
OSC  
OSC  
variable  
/64 or f  
f
/32 (12-clock mode) or f  
/32 or f  
/16 (6-clock mode)  
OSC  
OSC  
OSC  
OSC  
variable  
SM2  
Enables the multiprocessor communication feature in Modes 2 and 3. In Mode 2 or 3, if SM2 is set to 1, then Rl will not be  
activated if the received 9th data bit (RB8) is 0. In Mode 1, if SM2=1 then RI will not be activated if a valid stop bit was not  
received. In Mode 0, SM2 should be 0.  
REN  
TB8  
RB8  
Enables serial reception. Set by software to enable reception. Clear by software to disable reception.  
The 9th data bit that will be transmitted in Modes 2 and 3. Set or clear by software as desired.  
In Modes 2 and 3, is the 9th data bit that was received. In Mode 1, it SM2=0, RB8 is the stop bit that was received. In Mode 0,  
RB8 is not used.  
TI  
Transmit interrupt flag. Set by hardware at the end of the 8th bit time in Mode 0, or at the beginning of the stop bit in the other  
modes, in any serial transmission. Must be cleared by software.  
RI  
Receive interrupt flag. Set by hardware at the end of the 8th bit time in Mode 0, or halfway through the stop bit time in the other  
modes, in any serial reception (except see SM2). Must be cleared by software.  
SU01626  
Figure 7. Serial Port Control (SCON) Register  
Baud Rate  
Timer 1  
Mode  
f
SMOD  
OSC  
Mode  
12-clock mode  
6-clock mode  
C/T  
Reload Value  
Mode 0 Max  
Mode 2 Max  
Mode 1, 3 Max  
Mode 1, 3  
1.67 MHz  
625 k  
104.2 k  
19.2 k  
9.6 k  
3.34 MHz  
1250 k  
208.4 k  
38.4 k  
19.2 k  
9.6 k  
20 MHz  
20 MHz  
X
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
X
X
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
X
X
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
X
X
20 MHz  
FFH  
FDH  
FDH  
FAH  
F4H  
E8H  
1DH  
72H  
FEEBH  
11.059 MHz  
11.059 MHz  
11.059 MHz  
11.059 MHz  
11.059 MHz  
11.986 MHz  
6 MHz  
4.8 k  
2.4 k  
4.8 k  
1.2 k  
2.4 k  
137.5  
110  
275  
220  
110  
220  
12 MHz  
Figure 8. Timer 1 Generated Commonly Used Baud Rates  
More About Mode 0  
S6P2 of every machine cycle in which SEND is active, the contents  
of the transmit shift are shifted to the right one position.  
Serial data enters and exits through RxD. TxD outputs the shift  
clock. 8 bits are transmitted/received: 8 data bits (LSB first). The  
baud rate is fixed a 1/12 the oscillator frequency (12-clock mode) or  
1/6 the oscillator frequency (6-clock mode).  
As data bits shift out to the right, zeros come in from the left. When  
the MSB of the data byte is at the output position of the shift register,  
then the 1 that was initially loaded into the 9th position, is just to the  
left of the MSB, and all positions to the left of that contain zeros.  
This condition flags the TX Control block to do one last shift and  
then deactivate SEND and set T1. Both of these actions occur at  
S1P1 of the 10th machine cycle after “write to SBUF.”  
Figure 9 shows a simplified functional diagram of the serial port in  
Mode 0, and associated timing.  
Transmission is initiated by any instruction that uses SBUF as a  
destination register. The “write to SBUF” signal at S6P2 also loads a  
1 into the 9th position of the transmit shift register and tells the TX  
Control block to commence a transmission. The internal timing is  
such that one full machine cycle will elapse between “write to SBUF”  
and activation of SEND.  
Reception is initiated by the condition REN = 1 and R1 = 0. At S6P2  
of the next machine cycle, the RX Control unit writes the bits  
11111110 to the receive shift register, and in the next clock phase  
activates RECEIVE.  
RECEIVE enable SHIFT CLOCK to the alternate output function line  
of P3.1. SHIFT CLOCK makes transitions at S3P1 and S6P1 of  
every machine cycle. At S6P2 of every machine cycle in which  
RECEIVE is active, the contents of the receive shift register are  
SEND enables the output of the shift register to the alternate output  
function line of P3.0 and also enable SHIFT CLOCK to the alternate  
output function line of P3.1. SHIFT CLOCK is LOW during S3, S4,  
and S5 of every machine cycle, and HIGH during S6, S1, and S2. At  
23  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
shifted to the left one position. The value that comes in from the right  
is the value that was sampled at the P3.0 pin at S5P2 of the same  
machine cycle.  
whether the above conditions are met or not, the unit goes back to  
looking for a 1-to-0 transition in RxD.  
More About Modes 2 and 3  
As data bits come in from the right, 1s shift out to the left. When the  
0 that was initially loaded into the rightmost position arrives at the  
leftmost position in the shift register, it flags the RX Control block to  
do one last shift and load SBUF. At S1P1 of the 10th machine cycle  
after the write to SCON that cleared RI, RECEIVE is cleared as RI is  
set.  
Eleven bits are transmitted (through TxD), or received (through  
RxD): a start bit (0), 8 data bits (LSB first), a programmable 9th data  
bit, and a stop bit (1). On transmit, the 9th data bit (TB8) can be  
assigned the value of 0 or 1. On receive, the 9the data bit goes into  
RB8 in SCON. The baud rate is programmable to either 1/32 or 1/64  
(12-clock mode) or 1/16 or 1/32 the oscillator frequency (6-clock  
mode) the oscillator frequency in Mode 2. Mode 3 may have a  
variable baud rate generated from Timer 1 or Timer 2.  
More About Mode 1  
Ten bits are transmitted (through TxD), or received (through RxD): a  
start bit (0), 8 data bits (LSB first), and a stop bit (1). On receive, the  
stop bit goes into RB8 in SCON. In the 80C51 the baud rate is  
determined by the Timer 1 or Timer 2 overflow rate.  
Figures 11 and 12 show a functional diagram of the serial port in  
Modes 2 and 3. The receive portion is exactly the same as in Mode  
1. The transmit portion differs from Mode 1 only in the 9th bit of the  
transmit shift register.  
Figure 10 shows a simplified functional diagram of the serial port in  
Mode 1, and associated timings for transmit receive.  
Transmission is initiated by any instruction that uses SBUF as a  
destination register. The “write to SBUF” signal also loads TB8 into  
the 9th bit position of the transmit shift register and flags the TX  
Control unit that a transmission is requested. Transmission  
commences at S1P1 of the machine cycle following the next rollover  
in the divide-by-16 counter. (Thus, the bit times are synchronized to  
the divide-by-16 counter, not to the “write to SBUF” signal.)  
Transmission is initiated by any instruction that uses SBUF as a  
destination register. The “write to SBUF” signal also loads a 1 into  
the 9th bit position of the transmit shift register and flags the TX  
Control unit that a transmission is requested. Transmission actually  
commences at S1P1 of the machine cycle following the next rollover  
in the divide-by-16 counter. (Thus, the bit times are synchronized to  
the divide-by-16 counter, not to the “write to SBUF” signal.)  
The transmission begins with activation of SEND, which puts the  
start bit at TxD. One bit time later, DATA is activated, which enables  
the output bit of the transmit shift register to TxD. The first shift pulse  
occurs one bit time after that. The first shift clocks a 1 (the stop bit)  
into the 9th bit position of the shift register. Thereafter, only zeros  
are clocked in. Thus, as data bits shift out to the right, zeros are  
clocked in from the left. When TB8 is at the output position of the  
shift register, then the stop bit is just to the left of TB8, and all  
positions to the left of that contain zeros. This condition flags the TX  
Control unit to do one last shift and then deactivate SEND and set  
TI. This occurs at the 11th divide-by-16 rollover after “write to SUBF.”  
The transmission begins with activation of SEND which puts the  
start bit at TxD. One bit time later, DATA is activated, which enables  
the output bit of the transmit shift register to TxD. The first shift pulse  
occurs one bit time after that.  
As data bits shift out to the right, zeros are clocked in from the left.  
When the MSB of the data byte is at the output position of the shift  
register, then the 1 that was initially loaded into the 9th position is  
just to the left of the MSB, and all positions to the left of that contain  
zeros. This condition flags the TX Control unit to do one last shift  
and then deactivate SEND and set TI. This occurs at the 10th  
divide-by-16 rollover after “write to SBUF.”  
Reception is initiated by a detected 1-to-0 transition at RxD. For this  
purpose RxD is sampled at a rate of 16 times whatever baud rate  
has been established. When a transition is detected, the  
divide-by-16 counter is immediately reset, and 1FFH is written to the  
input shift register.  
Reception is initiated by a detected 1-to-0 transition at RxD. For this  
purpose RxD is sampled at a rate of 16 times whatever baud rate  
has been established. When a transition is detected, the  
divide-by-16 counter is immediately reset, and 1FFH is written into  
the input shift register. Resetting the divide-by-16 counter aligns its  
rollovers with the boundaries of the incoming bit times.  
At the 7th, 8th, and 9th counter states of each bit time, the bit  
detector samples the value of R-D. The value accepted is the value  
that was seen in at least 2 of the 3 samples. If the value accepted  
during the first bit time is not 0, the receive circuits are reset and the  
unit goes back to looking for another 1-to-0 transition. If the start bit  
proves valid, it is shifted into the input shift register, and reception of  
the rest of the frame will proceed.  
The 16 states of the counter divide each bit time into 16ths. At the  
7th, 8th, and 9th counter states of each bit time, the bit detector  
samples the value of RxD. The value accepted is the value that was  
seen in at least 2 of the 3 samples. This is done for noise rejection.  
If the value accepted during the first bit time is not 0, the receive  
circuits are reset and the unit goes back to looking for another 1-to-0  
transition. This is to provide rejection of false start bits. If the start bit  
proves valid, it is shifted into the input shift register, and reception of  
the rest of the frame will proceed.  
As data bits come in from the right, 1s shift out to the left. When the  
start bit arrives at the leftmost position in the shift register (which in  
Modes 2 and 3 is a 9-bit register), it flags the RX Control block to do  
one last shift, load SBUF and RB8, and set RI.  
The signal to load SBUF and RB8, and to set RI, will be generated  
if, and only if, the following conditions are met at the time the final  
shift pulse is generated.  
1. RI = 0, and  
2. Either SM2 = 0, or the received 9th data bit = 1.  
As data bits come in from the right, 1s shift out to the left. When the  
start bit arrives at the leftmost position in the shift register (which in  
mode 1 is a 9-bit register), it flags the RX Control block to do one  
last shift, load SBUF and RB8, and set RI. The signal to load SBUF  
and RB8, and to set RI, will be generated if, and only if, the following  
conditions are met at the time the final shift pulse is generated.:  
1. R1 = 0, and  
If either of these conditions is not met, the received frame is  
irretrievably lost, and RI is not set. If both conditions are met, the  
received 9th data bit goes into RB8, and the first 8 data bits go into  
SBUF. One bit time later, whether the above conditions were met or  
not, the unit goes back to looking for a 1-to-0 transition at the RxD  
input.  
2. Either SM2 = 0, or the received stop bit = 1.  
If either of these two conditions is not met, the received frame is  
irretrievably lost. If both conditions are met, the stop bit goes into  
RB8, the 8 data bits go into SBUF, and RI is activated. At this time,  
24  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
80C51 Internal Bus  
Write  
to  
SBUF  
RxD  
P3.0 Alt  
Output  
S
D
Q
SBUF  
CL  
Function  
Zero Detector  
Start  
Shift  
TX Control  
T1  
S6  
TX Clock  
Send  
Serial  
Port  
Interrupt  
TxD  
P3.1 Alt  
Output  
Function  
Shift  
Clock  
R1  
RX Clock  
Start  
Receive  
Shift  
RX Control  
REN  
RI  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
MSB  
LSB  
RxD  
P3.0 Alt  
Input  
Input Shift Register  
Function  
Shift  
Load  
SBUF  
LSB  
MSB  
SBUF  
Read  
SBUF  
80C51 Internal Bus  
S4 .  
ALE  
.
S1 . . . . S6 S1 . . . . S6 S1 . . . . S6 S1 . . . . S6 S1 . . . . S6 S1 . . . . S6 S1 . . . . S6 S1 . . . . S6 S1 . . . . S6 S1 . . . . S6 S1  
Write to SBUF  
S6P2  
Send  
Shift  
Transmit  
RxD (Data Out)  
D0  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D4  
D5  
D6  
D7  
TxD (Shift Clock)  
TI  
S3P1  
S6P1  
Write to SCON (Clear RI)  
RI  
Receive  
Shift  
Receive  
RxD (Data In)  
D0  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D4  
D5  
D6  
D7  
S5P2  
TxD (Shift Clock)  
SU00539  
Figure 9. Serial Port Mode 0  
25  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
Timer 1  
Overflow  
80C51 Internal Bus  
TB8  
Write  
to  
÷ 2  
SBUF  
SMOD = 1  
S
SMOD = 0  
D
Q
SBUF  
TxD  
CL  
Zero Detector  
Start  
Shift  
Data  
TX Control  
T1  
÷ 16  
TX Clock  
Send  
Serial  
Port  
Interrupt  
÷ 16  
Load  
SBUF  
RX Clock RI  
RX Control  
Sample  
1-to-0  
Transition  
Detector  
Shift  
Start  
1FFH  
Bit Detector  
Input Shift Register  
(9 Bits)  
Shift  
RxD  
Load  
SBUF  
SBUF  
Read  
SBUF  
80C51 Internal Bus  
TX  
Clock  
Write to SBUF  
Send  
Data  
Shift  
S1P1  
Transmit  
Start Bit  
TxD  
TI  
D0  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D4  
D5  
D6  
D7  
Stop Bit  
÷ 16 Reset  
RX  
Clock  
Start  
Bit  
RxD  
D0  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D4  
D5  
D6  
D7  
Stop Bit  
Bit Detector  
Receive  
Sample Times  
Shift  
RI  
SU00540  
Figure 10. Serial Port Mode 1  
26  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
80C51 Internal Bus  
TB8  
Write  
to  
SBUF  
S
D
Q
SBUF  
TxD  
CL  
Phase 2 Clock  
(1/2 f  
)
OSC  
Zero Detector  
Mode 2  
Stop Bit  
Gen.  
Shift  
Data  
Start  
TX Control  
÷ 16  
TX Clock  
T1  
Send  
SMOD = 1  
SMOD = 0  
Serial  
Port  
Interrupt  
÷ 2  
÷ 16  
(SMOD is  
PCON.7)  
Load  
SBUF  
R1  
RX Clock  
Sample  
RX Control  
1-to-0  
Transition  
Detector  
Shift  
Start  
1FFH  
Bit Detector  
Input Shift Register  
(9 Bits)  
Shift  
RxD  
Load  
SBUF  
SBUF  
Read  
SBUF  
80C51 Internal Bus  
TX  
Clock  
Write to SBUF  
Send  
S1P1  
Data  
Transmit  
Shift  
Start Bit  
TxD  
TI  
D0  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D4  
D5  
D6  
D7  
TB8  
Stop Bit  
Stop Bit Gen.  
÷ 16 Reset  
RX  
Clock  
Start  
Bit  
RxD  
D0  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D4  
D5  
D6  
D7  
RB8  
Stop Bit  
Bit Detector  
Receive  
Sample Times  
Shift  
RI  
SU00541  
Figure 11. Serial Port Mode 2  
27  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
Timer 1  
Overflow  
80C51 Internal Bus  
TB8  
Write  
to  
SBUF  
÷ 2  
SMOD = 1  
S
SMOD = 0  
D
Q
SBUF  
TxD  
CL  
Zero Detector  
Start  
Shift  
Data  
TX Control  
T1  
÷ 16  
TX Clock  
Send  
Serial  
Port  
Interrupt  
÷ 16  
Load  
SBUF  
R1  
RX Clock  
Sample  
RX Control  
1-to-0  
Transition  
Detector  
Shift  
Start  
1FFH  
Bit Detector  
Input Shift Register  
(9 Bits)  
Shift  
RxD  
Load  
SBUF  
SBUF  
Read  
SBUF  
80C51 Internal Bus  
TX  
Clock  
Write to SBUF  
Send  
S1P1  
Data  
Shift  
Transmit  
Start Bit  
TxD  
TI  
D0  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D4  
D5  
D6  
D7  
TB8  
Stop Bit  
Stop Bit Gen.  
÷ 16 Reset  
RX  
Clock  
Start  
Bit  
RxD  
D0  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D4  
D5  
D6  
D7  
RB8  
Stop Bit  
Bit Detector  
Receive  
Sample Times  
Shift  
RI  
SU00542  
Figure 12. Serial Port Mode 3  
28  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
Slave 1  
SADDR  
SADEN  
Given  
=
=
=
1100 0000  
1111 1110  
1100 000X  
Enhanced Features  
The UART operates in all of the usual modes that are described in  
the first section of Data Handbook IC20, 80C51-Based 8-Bit  
Microcontrollers. In addition the UART can perform framing error  
detect by looking for missing stop bits, and automatic address  
recognition. The UART also fully supports multiprocessor  
communication as does the standard 80C51 UART.  
In the above example SADDR is the same and the SADEN data is  
used to differentiate between the two slaves. Slave 0 requires a 0 in  
bit 0 and it ignores bit 1. Slave 1 requires a 0 in bit 1 and bit 0 is  
ignored. A unique address for Slave 0 would be 1100 0010 since  
slave 1 requires a 0 in bit 1. A unique address for slave 1 would be  
1100 0001 since a 1 in bit 0 will exclude slave 0. Both slaves can be  
selected at the same time by an address which has bit 0 = 0 (for  
slave 0) and bit 1 = 0 (for slave 1). Thus, both could be addressed  
with 1100 0000.  
When used for framing error detect the UART looks for missing stop  
bits in the communication. A missing bit will set the FE bit in the  
SCON register. The FE bit shares the SCON.7 bit with SM0 and the  
function of SCON.7 is determined by PCON.6 (SMOD0) (see  
Figure 7). If SMOD0 is set then SCON.7 functions as FE. SCON.7  
functions as SM0 when SMOD0 is cleared. When used as FE  
SCON.7 can only be cleared by software. Refer to Figure 13.  
In a more complex system the following could be used to select  
slaves 1 and 2 while excluding slave 0:  
Automatic Address Recognition  
Slave 0  
Slave 1  
Slave 2  
SADDR  
SADEN  
Given  
=
=
=
1100 0000  
1111 1001  
1100 0XX0  
Automatic Address Recognition is a feature which allows the UART  
to recognize certain addresses in the serial bit stream by using  
hardware to make the comparisons. This feature saves a great deal  
of software overhead by eliminating the need for the software to  
examine every serial address which passes by the serial port. This  
feature is enabled by setting the SM2 bit in SCON. In the 9 bit UART  
modes, mode 2 and mode 3, the Receive Interrupt flag (RI) will be  
automatically set when the received byte contains either the “Given”  
address or the “Broadcast” address. The 9-bit mode requires that  
the 9th information bit is a 1 to indicate that the received information  
is an address and not data. Automatic address recognition is shown  
in Figure 14.  
SADDR  
SADEN  
Given  
=
=
=
1110 0000  
1111 1010  
1110 0X0X  
SADDR  
SADEN  
Given  
=
=
=
1110 0000  
1111 1100  
1110 00XX  
In the above example the differentiation among the 3 slaves is in the  
lower 3 address bits. Slave 0 requires that bit 0 = 0 and it can be  
uniquely addressed by 1110 0110. Slave 1 requires that bit 1 = 0 and  
it can be uniquely addressed by 1110 and 0101. Slave 2 requires  
that bit 2 = 0 and its unique address is 1110 0011. To select Slaves 0  
and 1 and exclude Slave 2 use address 1110 0100, since it is  
necessary to make bit 2 = 1 to exclude slave 2.  
The 8 bit mode is called Mode 1. In this mode the RI flag will be set  
if SM2 is enabled and the information received has a valid stop bit  
following the 8 address bits and the information is either a Given or  
Broadcast address.  
Mode 0 is the Shift Register mode and SM2 is ignored.  
The Broadcast Address for each slave is created by taking the  
logical OR of SADDR and SADEN. Zeros in this result are trended  
as don’t-cares. In most cases, interpreting the don’t-cares as ones,  
the broadcast address will be FF hexadecimal.  
Using the Automatic Address Recognition feature allows a master to  
selectively communicate with one or more slaves by invoking the  
Given slave address or addresses. All of the slaves may be  
contacted by using the Broadcast address. Two special Function  
Registers are used to define the slave’s address, SADDR, and the  
address mask, SADEN. SADEN is used to define which bits in the  
SADDR are to b used and which bits are “don’t care”. The SADEN  
mask can be logically ANDed with the SADDR to create the “Given”  
address which the master will use for addressing each of the slaves.  
Use of the Given address allows multiple slaves to be recognized  
while excluding others. The following examples will help to show the  
versatility of this scheme:  
Upon reset SADDR (SFR address 0A9H) and SADEN (SFR  
address 0B9H) are leaded with 0s. This produces a given address  
of all “don’t cares” as well as a Broadcast address of all “don’t  
cares”. This effectively disables the Automatic Addressing mode and  
allows the microcontroller to use standard 80C51 type UART drivers  
which do not make use of this feature.  
Slave 0  
SADDR  
SADEN  
Given  
=
=
=
1100 0000  
1111 1101  
1100 00X0  
29  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
D0  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D4  
D5  
D6  
D7  
D8  
START  
BIT  
DATA BYTE  
ONLY IN  
MODE 2, 3  
STOP  
BIT  
SET FE BIT IF STOP BIT IS 0 (FRAMING ERROR)  
SM0 TO UART MODE CONTROL  
SCON  
(98H)  
SM0 / FE  
SMOD1  
SM1  
SM2  
REN  
POF  
TB8  
LVF  
RB8  
GF0  
TI  
RI  
PCON  
(87H)  
SMOD0  
GF1  
IDL  
0 : SCON.7 = SM0  
1 : SCON.7 = FE  
SU00044  
Figure 13. UART Framing Error Detection  
D0  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D4  
D5  
D6  
D7  
D8  
SCON  
(98H)  
SM0  
SM1  
SM2  
REN  
1
TB8  
X
RB8  
TI  
RI  
1
1
1
0
1
RECEIVED ADDRESS D0 TO D7  
PROGRAMMED ADDRESS  
COMPARATOR  
IN UART MODE 2 OR MODE 3 AND SM2 = 1:  
INTERRUPT IF REN=1, RB8=1 AND “RECEIVED ADDRESS” = “PROGRAMMED ADDRESS”  
– WHEN OWN ADDRESS RECEIVED, CLEAR SM2 TO RECEIVE DATA BYTES  
– WHEN ALL DATA BYTES HAVE BEEN RECEIVED: SET SM2 TO WAIT FOR NEXT ADDRESS.  
SU00045  
Figure 14. UART Multiprocessor Communication, Automatic Address Recognition  
30  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
2
SIO1 and SIO2, I C Serial I/O  
circuit must be disabled. For the SIO1 serial port, the slew-rate  
control circuits for both the SCL and SDA pins are disabled in the  
Standard mode (maximum slew-rate), and they are enabled in the  
Fast-mode. For the SIO2 serial port, the slew-rate control circuits  
for both pins are enabled by reset, but the Slew-Rate Disable bit  
(SRD bit) in the AUXR Register disables the slew-rate circuits for  
both the SCL1 and SDA1 pins when set for maximum slew-rates.  
This feature of the SIO2 slew-rate control is very useful for higher  
bus loads, higher temperatures and lower voltages that cause  
additional decreases in slew-rates.  
2
The I C-bus is a simple bi-directional 2-wire bus to transfer  
information between devices connected to the bus. The main  
features of the bus are:  
Only two bus lines are required: a serial clock line (SCL) and a  
serial data line (SDA).  
Bi-directional data transfer between masters and slaves.  
Each device connected to the bus is software addressable by a  
unique address.  
All of the functional descriptions discussed below apply to  
both the SIO1 and the SIO2 I C serial ports although the text  
Masters can operate as Master-transmitter or as Master-receiver.  
2
may refer to the SIO1 only. See page 10 for the corresponding  
SIO2 register addresses.  
It is a true multi-master bus (no central master) and includes  
collision detection and arbitration to prevent data corruption if two  
or more masters simultaneously initiate data transfer.  
2
The I C on-chip logic performs a byte oriented data transfer, clock  
generation, address recognition and bus control arbitration, and  
Serial clock synchronization allows devices with different bit rates  
2
interfaces to the external I C-bus via the two port pins SCL and  
to communicate via the same serial bus.  
2
SDA. It meets the I C-bus specification and supports all transfer  
2
Serial clock synchronization can be used as a handshake  
modes (other than the low-speed mode) from-and-to the I C-bus.  
mechanism to suspend and resume serial transfer.  
The logic handles byte transfers autonomously. It also keeps track  
of serial transfers, and a status register (SxSTA) reflects the status  
2
Devices can be added to or removed from an I C-bus system  
2
of the SIOx logic and the I C-bus.  
without affecting any other device on the bus.  
2
The CPU interfaces to the logic of each of the two I Cs via the  
Fault diagnostics and debugging are simple; malfunctions can be  
following four Special Function Registers (where x=1,2):  
immediately traced.  
SxCON: Control register, bit addressable by the CPU.  
2
For more information see the Philips publication “The I C-Bus  
SxSTA: Status register whose contents may be used as a vector  
Specification”, especially for detailed descriptions of the Fast and  
the Standard data-transfer modes. Also, refer to the data sheets for  
the 8xC552, the 8xC554, the 8xC557, and the 8xC65x.  
to service routines.  
SxDAT: Data shift register; the data byte is stable as long as the  
SI bit = 1 (SxCON.3).  
2
The SIO1 I C serial port interface has a selectable bi-directional  
data-transfer mode, either the 400Kbit/s Fast-mode or the 100Kbit/s  
Standard-mode. In the Fast-mode, the port performance and the  
register definitions are identical to those of the 8xC557 devices, and  
in the Standard-mode (the reset default), they are identical to those  
of the 8xC652, 8xC654, 8xC552, and 8xC554 devices.  
SxADR: Slave address register; its LSB enables / disables  
general call address recognition.  
2
A typical I C-bus configuration is shown in Figure 15, and Figure 16  
shows how a data transfer is accomplished on the bus. Depending  
on the state of the direction bit (R/W), two types of data transfers are  
The Fast-mode is functionally the same as the Standard-mode  
except for the bit rate selection (see Tables 7 and 8), the timing  
2
possible on the I C-bus:  
1. Data transfer from a master transmitter to a slave receiver. The  
first byte transmitted by the master is the slave address. Next  
follows a number of data bytes. The slave returns an  
acknowledge bit after each received byte.  
2
of the SCL and SDA signals (see the I C electrical  
characteristics), and the output slew-rate control. The  
Fast-mode allows up to a four-fold bit-rate increase over that of  
the Standard-mode, and yet, it is downward compatible with the  
Standard-mode, i.e. it can be used in a 0 to 100Kbit/s bus  
system.  
2. Data transfer from a slave transmitter to a master receiver. The  
first byte (the slave address) is transmitted by the master. The  
slave then returns an acknowledge bit. Next follows the data  
bytes transmitted by the slave to the master. The master returns  
an acknowledge bit after all received bytes other than the last  
byte. At the end of the last received byte, a “not acknowledge” is  
returned.  
2
The SCL serial port for the clock line of the I C bus is an alternate  
function of the P1.6 port pin, and the SDA serial port for the data line  
2
of the I C bus is an alternate function of the P1.7 port pin.  
Consequently, these 2 port pins are open drain outputs (no  
pull-ups), and the output latches of P1.6 and P1.7 must be set to  
logic 1 in order to enable the SIO1 outputs.  
The master device generates all of the serial clock pulses and the  
START and STOP conditions. A transfer is ended with a STOP  
condition or with a repeated START condition. Since a repeated  
START condition is also the beginning of the next serial transfer, the  
2
The second I C serial port of the 8xC661X2, SIO2, has the  
400Kbit/s Fast data-transfer mode only and selectable slew-rate  
control of the output pins. It also has the same port performance  
and register definitions as those of the 8xC557. The SCL1 and  
SDA1 serial ports have dedicated pins with open-drain outputs and  
Schmitt-trigger inputs.  
2
I C bus will not be released.  
Modes of Operation: The on-chip SIO1 logic may operate in the  
following four modes:  
There is an analog circuit for controlling the turn-on and turn-off  
rates of the output pull-down (slew-rate control circuit) which is  
required to meet the electrical specifications of the Fast-mode under  
nominal conditions (5 V). To achieve the maximum slew-rates, the  
1. Master Transmitter Mode:  
Serial data output through P1.7/SDA while P1.6/SCL outputs the  
serial clock. The first byte transmitted contains the slave address  
31  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
of the receiving device (7 bytes) and the data direction bit. In this  
case the data direction bit (R/W) will be logic 0, and we say that  
a “W” is transmitted. Thus the first byte transmitted is SLA+W.  
Serial data is transmitted 8 bits at a time. After each byte is  
transmitted, an acknowledge bit is received. START and STOP  
conditions are output to indicate the beginning and the end of a  
serial transfer.  
transmitted. START and STOP conditions are recognized as the  
beginning and end of a serial transfer. Address recognition is  
performed by hardware after reception of the slave address and  
direction bit.  
4. Slave Transmitter Mode:  
The first byte is received and handled as in the slave receiver  
mode. However, in this mode, the direction bit will indicate that  
the transfer direction is reversed. Serial data is transmitted via  
P1.7/SDA while the serial clock is input through P1.6/SCL.  
START and STOP conditions are recognized as the beginning  
and end of a serial transfer.  
2. Master Receiver Mode:  
The first byte transmitted contains the slave address of  
the transmitting device (7 bits) and the data direction bit. In this  
case, the data direction bit (R/W) will be logic 1, and we say that  
an “R” is transmitted. Thus the first byte transmitted is SLA+R.  
Serial data is received via P1.7/SDA while P1.6/SCL outputs the  
serial clock. Serial data is received 8 bits at a time. After each  
byte is received an acknowledge bit is transmitted. START and  
STOP conditions are output to indicate the beginning and end of  
a serial transfer.  
In a given application, SIO1 may operate as a master and as a  
slave. In the slave mode, the SIO1 hardware looks for its own slave  
address and the general call address. If one of these addresses is  
detected, an interrupt is requested. When the microcontroller wishes  
to become the bus master, the hardware waits until the bus is free  
before the master mode is entered so that a possible slave action is  
not interrupted. If bus arbitration is lost in the master mode, SIO1  
switches to the slave mode immediately and can detect its own  
slave address in the same serial transfer.  
3. Slave Receiver Mode:  
Serial data and the serial clock are received through P1.7/SDA  
and P1.6/SCL. After each byte is received, an acknowledge bit is  
V
DD  
R
P
R
P
SDA  
SCL  
2
I
C bus  
P1.7/SDA  
P1.6/SCL  
OTHER DEVICE WITH  
OTHER DEVICE WITH  
2
P8xC66xX2  
2
I
C INTERFACE  
I
C INTERFACE  
SU01748  
2
Figure 15. Typical I C Bus Configuration  
STOP  
CONDITION  
SDA  
REPEATED  
START  
CONDITION  
MSB  
SLAVE ADDRESS  
R/W  
DIRECTION  
BIT  
ACKNOWLEDGMENT  
SIGNAL FROM RECEIVER  
ACKNOWLEDGMENT  
SIGNAL FROM RECEIVER  
CLOCK LINE HELD LOW WHILE  
INTERRUPTS ARE SERVICED  
SCL  
1
2
7
8
9
1
2
3–8  
9
ACK  
ACK  
S
P/S  
REPEATED IF MORE BYTES  
ARE TRANSFERRED  
START  
CONDITION  
SU00965  
2
Figure 16. Data Transfer on the I C Bus  
32  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
SIO1 Implementation and Operation: Figure 17 shows how the  
on-chip I C bus interface is implemented, and the following text  
COMPARATOR  
2
The comparator compares the received 7-bit slave address with its  
own slave address (7 most significant bits in S1ADR). It also  
compares the first received 8-bit byte with the general call address  
(00H). If an equality is found, the appropriate status bits are set and  
an interrupt is requested.  
describes the individual blocks.  
INPUT FILTERS AND OUTPUT STAGES  
2
The input filters have I C compatible input levels. If the input voltage  
is less than 1.5 V, the input logic level is interpreted as 0; if the input  
voltage is greater than 3.0 V, the input logic level is interpreted as 1.  
SHIFT REGISTER, S1DAT  
Input signals are synchronized with the internal clock (f  
/4), and  
This 8-bit special function register contains a byte of serial data to  
be transmitted or a byte which has just been received. Data in  
S1DAT is always shifted from right to left; the first bit to be  
transmitted is the MSB (bit 7) and, after a byte has been received,  
the first bit of received data is located at the MSB of S1DAT. While  
data is being shifted out, data on the bus is simultaneously being  
shifted in; S1DAT always contains the last byte present on the bus.  
Thus, in the event of lost arbitration, the transition from master  
transmitter to slave receiver is made with the correct data in S1DAT.  
OSC  
spikes shorter than three oscillator periods are filtered out.  
The output stages consist of open drain transistors that can sink  
3 mA at V < 0.4 V. These open drain outputs do not have  
OUT  
2
clamping diodes to V . Thus, if the device is connected to the I C  
DD  
2
bus and V is switched off, the I C bus is not affected.  
DD  
ADDRESS REGISTER, S1ADR  
This 8-bit special function register may be loaded with the 7-bit slave  
address (7 most significant bits) to which SIO1 will respond when  
programmed as a slave transmitter or receiver. The LSB (GC) is  
used to enable general call address (00H) recognition.  
33  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
8
S1ADR  
ADDRESS REGISTER  
P1.7  
COMPARATOR  
INPUT  
FILTER  
P1.7/SDA  
S1DAT  
OUTPUT  
STAGE  
SHIFT REGISTER  
ACK  
8
ARBITRATION &  
SYNC LOGIC  
INPUT  
FILTER  
TIMING  
&
CONTROL  
LOGIC  
f
/4  
OSC  
P1.6/SCL  
SERIAL CLOCK  
GENERATOR  
OUTPUT  
STAGE  
INTERRUPT  
TIMER 1  
OVERFLOW  
S1CON  
CONTROL REGISTER  
P1.6  
8
STATUS BITS  
STATUS  
DECODER  
S1STA  
STATUS REGISTER  
8
su00966  
2
Figure 17. I C Bus Serial Interface Block Diagram  
34  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
ARBITRATION AND SYNCHRONIZATION LOGIC  
In the master transmitter mode, the arbitration logic checks that  
every transmitted logic 1 actually appears as a logic 1 on the I C  
bus. If another device on the bus overrules a logic 1 and pulls the  
SDA line LOW, arbitration is lost, and SIO1 immediately changes  
from master transmitter to slave receiver. SIO1 will continue to  
output clock pulses (on SCL) until transmission of the current serial  
byte is complete.  
The synchronization logic will synchronize the serial clock generator  
with the clock pulses on the SCL line from another device. If two or  
more master devices generate clock pulses, the “mark” duration is  
determined by the device that generates the shortest “marks,” and  
the “space” duration is determined by the device that generates the  
longest “spaces.” Figure 19 shows the synchronization procedure.  
2
A slave may stretch the space duration to slow down the bus  
master. The space duration may also be stretched for handshaking  
purposes. This can be done after each bit or after a complete byte  
transfer. SIO1 will stretch the SCL space duration after a byte has  
been transmitted or received and the acknowledge bit has been  
transferred. The serial interrupt flag (SI) is set, and the stretching  
continues until the serial interrupt flag is cleared.  
Arbitration may also be lost in the master receiver mode. Loss of  
arbitration in this mode can only occur while SIO1 is returning a “not  
acknowledge: (logic 1) to the bus. Arbitration is lost when another  
device on the bus pulls this signal LOW. Since this can occur only at  
the end of a serial byte, SIO1 generates no further clock pulses.  
Figure 18 shows the arbitration procedure.  
(3)  
(1)  
(1)  
(2)  
SDA  
SCL  
2
3
4
8
9
1
ACK  
1. Another device transmits identical serial data.  
2. Another device overrules a logic 1 (dotted line) transmitted by SIO1 (master) by pulling the SDA line low. Arbitration is  
lost, and SIO1 enters the slave receiver mode.  
3. SIO1 is in the slave receiver mode but still generates clock pulses until the current byte has been transmitted. SIO1 will  
not generate clock pulses for the next byte. Data on SDA originates from the new master once it has won arbitration.  
SU00967  
Figure 18. Arbitration Procedure  
SDA  
(1)  
(3)  
(1)  
SCL  
(2)  
MARK  
DURATION  
SPACE DURATION  
1. Another service pulls the SCL line low before the SIO1 “mark” duration is complete. The serial clock generator is immediately  
reset and commences with the “space” duration by pulling SCL low.  
2. Another device still pulls the SCL line low after SIO1 releases SCL. The serial clock generator is forced into the wait state  
until the SCL line is released.  
3. The SCL line is released, and the serial clock generator commences with the mark duration.  
SU00968  
Figure 19. Serial Clock Synchronization  
35  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
SERIAL CLOCK GENERATOR  
read from and write to this 8-bit, directly addressable SFR while it is  
not in the process of shifting a byte. This occurs when SIO1 is in a  
defined state and the serial interrupt flag is set. Data in S1DAT  
remains stable as long as SI is set. Data in S1DAT is always shifted  
from right to left: the first bit to be transmitted is the MSB (bit 7), and,  
after a byte has been received, the first bit of received data is  
located at the MSB of S1DAT. While data is being shifted out, data  
on the bus is simultaneously being shifted in; S1DAT always  
contains the last data byte present on the bus. Thus, in the event of  
lost arbitration, the transition from master transmitter to slave  
receiver is made with the correct data in S1DAT.  
This programmable clock pulse generator provides the SCL clock  
pulses when SIO1 is in the master transmitter or master receiver  
mode. It is switched off when SIO1 is in a slave mode. In standard  
speed mode, the programmable output clock frequencies are:  
f
/120, f  
/9600, and the Timer 1 overflow rate divided by eight.  
OSC  
OSC  
The output clock pulses have a 50% duty cycle unless the clock  
generator is synchronized with other SCL clock sources as  
described above.  
TIMING AND CONTROL  
The timing and control logic generates the timing and control signals  
for serial byte handling. This logic block provides the shift pulses for  
S1DAT, enables the comparator, generates and detects start and  
stop conditions, receives and transmits acknowledge bits, controls  
the master and slave modes, contains interrupt request logic, and  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
S1DAT (DAH)  
SD7  
SD6  
SD5  
SD4  
SD3  
SD2  
SD1  
SD0  
shift direction  
2
monitors the I C bus status.  
SD7 - SD0:  
CONTROL REGISTER, S1CON  
Eight bits to be transmitted or just received. A logic 1 in S1DAT  
corresponds to a HIGH level on the I C bus, and a logic 0  
corresponds to a LOW level on the bus. Serial data shifts through  
S1DAT from right to left. Figure 20 shows how data in S1DAT is  
serially transferred to and from the SDA line.  
2
This 7-bit special function register is used by the microcontroller to  
control the following SIO1 functions: start and restart of a serial  
transfer, termination of a serial transfer, bit rate, address recognition,  
and acknowledgment.  
STATUS DECODER AND STATUS REGISTER  
The status decoder takes all of the internal status bits and  
compresses them into a 5-bit code. This code is unique for each I C  
S1DAT and the ACK flag form a 9-bit shift register which shifts in or  
shifts out an 8-bit byte, followed by an acknowledge bit. The ACK  
flag is controlled by the SIO1 hardware and cannot be accessed by  
the CPU. Serial data is shifted through the ACK flag into S1DAT on  
the rising edges of serial clock pulses on the SCL line. When a byte  
has been shifted into S1DAT, the serial data is available in S1DAT,  
and the acknowledge bit is returned by the control logic during the  
ninth clock pulse. Serial data is shifted out from S1DAT via a buffer  
(BSD7) on the falling edges of clock pulses on the SCL line.  
2
bus status. The 5-bit code may be used to generate vector  
addresses for fast processing of the various service routines. Each  
service routine processes a particular bus status. There are 26  
possible bus states if all four modes of SIO1 are used. The 5-bit  
status code is latched into the five most significant bits of the status  
register when the serial interrupt flag is set (by hardware) and  
remains stable until the interrupt flag is cleared by software. The  
three least significant bits of the status register are always zero. If  
the status code is used as a vector to service routines, then the  
routines are displaced by eight address locations. Eight bytes of  
code is sufficient for most of the service routines (see the software  
example in this section).  
When the CPU writes to S1DAT, BSD7 is loaded with the content of  
S1DAT.7, which is the first bit to be transmitted to the SDA line (see  
Figure 21). After nine serial clock pulses, the eight bits in S1DAT will  
have been transmitted to the SDA line, and the acknowledge bit will  
be present in ACK. Note that the eight transmitted bits are shifted  
back into S1DAT.  
The Four SIO1 Special Function Registers: The microcontroller  
interfaces to SIO1 via four special function registers. These four  
SFRs (S1ADR, S1DAT, S1CON, and S1STA) are described  
individually in the following sections.  
The Control Register, S1CON: The CPU can read from and write  
to this 8-bit, directly addressable SFR. Two bits are affected by the  
SIO1 hardware: the SI bit is set when a serial interrupt is requested,  
and the STO bit is cleared when a STOP condition is present on the  
2
The Address Register, S1ADR: The CPU can read from and write  
to this 8-bit, directly addressable SFR. S1ADR is not affected by the  
SIO1 hardware. The contents of this register are irrelevant when  
SIO1 is in a master mode. In the slave modes, the seven most  
significant bits must be loaded with the microcontroller’s own slave  
address, and, if the least significant bit is set, the general call  
address (00H) is recognized; otherwise it is ignored.  
I C bus. The STO bit is also cleared when ENS1 = “0”.  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
S1CON (D8H) CR2  
ENS1  
STA  
STO  
SI  
AA  
CR1  
CR0  
ENS1, THE SIO1 ENABLE BIT  
ENS1 = “0”: When ENS1 is “0”, the SDA and SCL outputs are in a  
high impedance state. SDA and SCL input signals are ignored, SIO1  
is in the “not addressed” slave state, and the STO bit in S1CON is  
forced to “0”. No other bits are affected. P1.6 and P1.7 may be used  
as open drain I/O ports.  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
S1ADR (DBH)  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
GC  
own slave address  
ENS1 = “1”: When ENS1 is “1”, SIO1 is enabled. The P1.6 and P1.7  
port latches must be set to logic 1.  
The most significant bit corresponds to the first bit received from the  
2
I C bus after a start condition. A logic 1 in S1ADR corresponds to a  
2
ENS1 should not be used to temporarily release SIO1 from the I2C  
bus since, when ENS1 is reset, the I2C bus status is lost. The AA  
flag should be used instead (see description of the AA flag in the  
following text).  
HIGH level on the I C bus, and a logic 0 corresponds to a LOW  
level on the bus.  
The Data Register, S1DAT: S1DAT contains a byte of serial data to  
be transmitted or a byte which has just been received. The CPU can  
36  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
INTERNAL BUS  
SDA  
8
BSD7  
S1DAT  
ACK  
SCL  
SHIFT PULSES  
SU00969  
Figure 20. Serial Input/Output Configuration  
SDA  
SCL  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
A
SHIFT ACK & S1DAT  
SHIFT IN  
ACK  
(2)  
(2)  
(2)  
(2)  
(2)  
(2)  
(2)  
(2)  
(2)  
(2)  
(2)  
(2)  
(2)  
(2)  
(2)  
A
S1DAT  
(1)  
(2)  
(1)  
SHIFT BSD7  
SHIFT OUT  
BSD7  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
(3)  
LOADED BY THE CPU  
(1) Valid data in S1DAT  
(2) Shifting data in S1DAT and ACK  
(3) High level on SDA  
SU00970  
Figure 21. Shift-in and Shift-out Timing  
In the following text, it is assumed that ENS1 = “1”.  
STA = “0”: When the STA bit is reset, no START condition or  
repeated START condition will be generated.  
STA, THE START FLAG  
STA = “1”: When the STA bit is set to enter a master mode, the SIO1  
hardware checks the status of the I2C bus and generates a START  
condition if the bus is free. If the bus is not free, then SIO1 waits for  
a STOP condition (which will free the bus) and generates a START  
condition after a delay of a half clock period of the internal serial  
clock generator.  
STO, THE STOP FLAG  
STO = “1”: When the STO bit is set while SIO1 is in a master mode,  
a STOP condition is transmitted to the I C bus. When the STOP  
2
condition is detected on the bus, the SIO1 hardware clears the STO  
flag. In a slave mode, the STO flag may be set to recover from an  
error condition. In this case, no STOP condition is transmitted to the  
2
I C bus. However, the SIO1 hardware behaves as if a STOP  
If STA is set while SIO1 is already in a master mode and one or  
more bytes are transmitted or received, SIO1 transmits a repeated  
START condition. STA may be set at any time. STA may also be set  
when SIO1 is an addressed slave.  
condition has been received and switches to the defined “not  
addressed” slave receiver mode. The STO flag is automatically  
cleared by hardware.  
37  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
If the STA and STO bits are both set, the a STOP condition is  
transmitted to the I C bus if SIO1 is in a master mode (in a slave  
mode, SIO1 generates an internal STOP condition which is not  
transmitted). SIO1 then transmits a START condition.  
bus status is monitored. While SIO1 is released from the bus,  
START and STOP conditions are detected, and serial data is shifted  
in. Address recognition can be resumed at any time by setting the  
AA flag. If the AA flag is set when the part’s own slave address or  
the general call address has been partly received, the address will  
be recognized at the end of the byte transmission.  
2
STO = “0”: When the STO bit is reset, no STOP condition will be  
generated.  
CR0, CR1, AND CR2, THE CLOCK RATE BITS  
These three bits determine the serial clock frequency when SIO1 is  
in a master mode. The various serial rates are shown in Table 7.  
SI, THE SERIAL INTERRUPT FLAG  
SI = “1”: When the SI flag is set, then, if the EA and ES1 (interrupt  
enable register) bits are also set, a serial interrupt is requested. SI is  
set by hardware when one of 25 of the 26 possible SIO1 states is  
entered. The only state that does not cause SI to be set is state  
F8H, which indicates that no relevant state information is available.  
For the SIO1 serial port, the Standard data transfer mode is the  
default mode after reset. To change the data transfer mode to the  
Fast–mode, the Fast Mode Enable bit (FME bit) of the AUXR  
Register (AUXR.3 bit) must be set. After setting the FME bit you  
cannot clear it (a one–time set bit), and it can only be cleared with  
a reset.  
While SI is set, the LOW period of the serial clock on the SCL line is  
stretched, and the serial transfer is suspended. A HIGH level on the  
SCL line is unaffected by the serial interrupt flag. SI must be reset  
by software.  
For the SIO2 serial port, the analog circuits for controlling the  
slew–rates of the output pull-downs may be disabled with the  
Slew–Rate Disable bit (AUXR.5 bit). For maximum slew rates,  
setting this bit disables the slew–rate control circuits of the SCL1  
and SDA1 pins. This bit is cleared by reset (reset default), and it  
can be set/cleared by software. This feature of the SIO2 slew–rate  
control is very useful for higher bus loads, higher temperatures and  
lower voltages that cause additional decreases in slew–rates.  
SI = “0”: When the SI flag is reset, no serial interrupt is requested,  
and there is no stretching of the serial clock on the SCL line.  
AA, THE ASSERT ACKNOWLEDGE FLAG  
AA = “1”: If the AA flag is set, an acknowledge (LOW level to SDA)  
will be returned during the acknowledge clock pulse on the SCL line  
when:  
– The “own slave address” has been received  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
– The general call address has been received while the general call  
bit (GC) in S1ADR is set  
AUXR (8EH)  
SRD  
FME  
EX-  
TRAM  
A0  
– A data byte has been received while SIO1 is in the master  
receiver mode  
– A data byte has been received while SIO1 is in the addressed  
slave receiver mode  
2
A 12.5kHz bit rate may be used by devices that interface to the I C  
bus via standard I/O port lines which are software driven and slow.  
100kHz is usually the maximum bit rate and can be derived from a  
16 MHz, 12 MHz, or a 6 MHz oscillator. A variable bit rate (0.5kHz to  
62.5kHz) may also be used if Timer 1 is not required for any other  
purpose while SIO1 is in a master mode.  
AA = “0”: if the AA flag is reset, a not acknowledge (HIGH level to  
SDA) will be returned during the acknowledge clock pulse on SCL  
when:  
– A data has been received while SIO1 is in the master receiver  
mode  
The frequencies shown in Table 7 are unimportant when SIO1 is in a  
slave mode. In the slave modes, SIO1 will automatically synchronize  
with any clock frequency up to 100kHz.  
– A data byte has been received while SIO1 is in the addressed  
slave receiver mode  
The Status Register, S1STA: S1STA is an 8-bit read-only special  
function register. The three least significant bits are always zero.  
The five most significant bits contain the status code. There are 26  
possible status codes. When S1STA contains F8H, no relevant state  
information is available and no serial interrupt is requested. All other  
S1STA values correspond to defined SIO1 states. When each of  
these states is entered, a serial interrupt is requested (SI = “1”). A  
valid status code is present in S1STA one machine cycle after SI is  
set by hardware and is still present one machine cycle after SI has  
been reset by software.  
When SIO1 is in the addressed slave transmitter mode, state C8H  
will be entered after the last serial is transmitted (see Figure 25).  
When SI is cleared, SIO1 leaves state C8H, enters the not  
addressed slave receiver mode, and the SDA line remains at a  
HIGH level. In state C8H, the AA flag can be set again for future  
address recognition.  
When SIO1 is in the not addressed slave mode, its own slave  
address and the general call address are ignored. Consequently, no  
acknowledge is returned, and a serial interrupt is not requested.  
2
Thus, SIO1 can be temporarily released from the I C bus while the  
38  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
2
Table 7.  
400 kbytes I C interface serial clock rates  
BIT FREQUENCY (kHz) AT f  
in 6X MODE  
f
DIVIDE BY  
OSC  
OSC  
CR2  
1
CR1  
0
CR0  
0
3 MHz  
25  
6 MHz  
50  
12 MHz  
16 MHz  
133  
10  
24 MHz  
200  
30 MHz  
250  
100  
8
120  
1600  
80  
1
0
1
2
4
15  
19  
1
1
0
38  
75  
150  
200  
400  
15  
200  
267  
533  
20  
300  
375  
1
1
1
50  
100  
200  
8
400  
500  
60  
0
0
0
100  
4
800  
1000  
38  
30  
0
0
1
30  
800  
20  
0
1
0
150  
200  
300  
400  
600  
800  
800  
1067  
1200  
1600  
1500  
2000  
0
1
1
15  
BIT FREQUENCY (kHz) AT f  
in 12X MODE  
f
DIVIDE BY  
OSC  
OSC  
CR2  
1
CR1  
0
CR0  
0
3 MHz  
13  
6 MHz  
25  
12 MHz  
50  
16 MHz  
67  
24 MHz  
100  
8
33 MHz  
138  
10  
240  
3200  
160  
120  
60  
1
0
1
1
2
4
5
1
1
0
19  
38  
75  
100  
133  
267  
10  
150  
200  
400  
15  
206  
275  
550  
21  
1
1
1
25  
50  
100  
200  
8
0
0
0
50  
100  
4
0
0
1
2
1600  
40  
0
1
0
75  
150  
200  
300  
400  
400  
533  
600  
800  
825  
1100  
0
1
1
100  
30  
39  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
2
Table 8.  
100 kbytes I C interface serial clock rates  
BIT FREQUENCY (kHz) AT f  
in 6X MODE  
f
DIVIDE BY  
OSC  
OSC  
CR2  
0
CR1  
0
CR0  
0
3 MHz  
6 MHz  
47  
12 MHz  
16 MHz  
125  
24 MHz  
188  
30 MHz  
234  
23  
94  
128  
112  
96  
0
0
1
27  
54  
107  
143  
214  
268  
0
1
0
31  
63  
125  
167  
250  
313  
0
1
1
38  
75  
150  
200  
300  
375  
80  
1
0
0
6
13  
25  
33  
50  
63  
480  
60  
1
0
1
50  
100  
200  
0.5 to 62.5  
200  
267  
400  
500  
1
1
0
100  
400  
533  
800  
1000  
2.4 to 313  
30  
1
1
1
0.2 to 31.2  
1.0 to 125  
1.3 to 167  
2.0 to 250  
48x(256–(reload  
value Timer1))  
Mode 2 value range:  
0 to 254  
BIT FREQUENCY (kHz) AT f  
in 12X MODE  
f
DIVIDE BY  
OSC  
OSC  
CR2  
0
CR1  
0
CR0  
0
3 MHz  
6 MHz  
12 MHz  
47  
16 MHz  
63  
24 MHz  
94  
33 MHz  
129  
12  
23  
256  
224  
192  
160  
960  
120  
60  
0
0
1
13  
27  
54  
71  
107  
147  
0
1
0
16  
31  
63  
83  
125  
172  
0
1
1
19  
38  
75  
100  
150  
206  
1
0
0
3
6
13  
17  
25  
34  
1
0
1
25  
50  
100  
133  
200  
275  
1
1
0
50  
100  
200  
267  
400  
550  
1
1
1
0.1 to 15.6  
0.2 to 31.3  
0.5 to 62.5  
0.7 to 83.3  
1.0 to 125  
1.3 to 172  
96x(256–(reload val-  
ue Timer1))  
Mode 2 value range:  
0 to 254  
40  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
More Information on SIO1 Operating Modes: The four operating  
modes are:  
may switch to the master receiver mode by loading S1DAT with  
SLA+R).  
– Master Transmitter  
Master Receiver Mode: In the master receiver mode, a number of  
data bytes are received from a slave transmitter (see Figure 23).  
The transfer is initialized as in the master transmitter mode. When  
the start condition has been transmitted, the interrupt service routine  
must load S1DAT with the 7-bit slave address and the data direction  
bit (SLA+R). The SI bit in S1CON must then be cleared before the  
serial transfer can continue.  
– Master Receiver  
– Slave Receiver  
– Slave Transmitter  
Data transfers in each mode of operation are shown in Figures  
22–25. These figures contain the following abbreviations:  
Abbreviation  
S
SLA  
R
W
A
A
Data  
P
Explanation  
Start condition  
7-bit slave address  
Read bit (HIGH level at SDA)  
Write bit (LOW level at SDA)  
Acknowledge bit (LOW level at SDA)  
Not acknowledge bit (HIGH level at SDA)  
8-bit data byte  
When the slave address and the data direction bit have been  
transmitted and an acknowledgment bit has been received, the  
serial interrupt flag (SI) is set again, and a number of status codes in  
S1STA are possible. These are 40H, 48H, or 38H for the master  
mode and also 68H, 78H, or B0H if the slave mode was enabled  
(AA = logic 1). The appropriate action to be taken for each of these  
status codes is detailed in Table 10. ENS1, CR1, and CR0 are not  
affected by the serial transfer and are not referred to in Table 10.  
After a repeated start condition (state 10H), SIO1 may switch to the  
master transmitter mode by loading S1DAT with SLA+W.  
Stop condition  
In Figures 22-25, circles are used to indicate when the serial  
interrupt flag is set. The numbers in the circles show the status code  
held in the S1STA register. At these points, a service routine must  
be executed to continue or complete the serial transfer. These  
service routines are not critical since the serial transfer is suspended  
until the serial interrupt flag is cleared by software.  
Slave Receiver Mode: In the slave receiver mode, a number of  
data bytes are received from a master transmitter (see Figure 24).  
To initiate the slave receiver mode, S1ADR and S1CON must be  
loaded as follows:  
When a serial interrupt routine is entered, the status code in S1STA  
is used to branch to the appropriate service routine. For each status  
code, the required software action and details of the following serial  
transfer are given in Tables 9-13.  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
S1ADR (DBH)  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
GC  
own slave address  
Master Transmitter Mode: In the master transmitter mode, a  
number of data bytes are transmitted to a slave receiver (see  
Figure 22). Before the master transmitter mode can be entered,  
S1CON must be initialized as follows:  
The upper 7 bits are the address to which SIO1 will respond when  
addressed by a master. If the LSB (GC) is set, SIO1 will respond to  
the general call address (00H); otherwise it ignores the general call  
address.  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
S1CON (D8H)  
CR2  
ENS1  
STA  
STO  
SI  
AA  
CR1  
CR0  
S1CON (D8H) CR2  
ENS1  
STA  
STO  
SI  
AA  
CR1  
CR0  
bit  
rate  
bit rate  
1
0
0
0
X
X
1
0
0
0
1
X
X
CR0, CR1, and CR2 define the serial bit rate. ENS1 must be set to  
logic 1 to enable SIO1. If the AA bit is reset, SIO1 will not  
acknowledge its own slave address or the general call address in  
the event of another device becoming master of the bus. In other  
words, if AA is reset, SIO0 cannot enter a slave mode. STA, STO,  
and SI must be reset.  
CR0, CR1, and CR2 do not affect SIO1 in the slave mode. ENS1  
must be set to logic 1 to enable SIO1. The AA bit must be set to  
enable SIO1 to acknowledge its own slave address or the general  
call address. STA, STO, and SI must be reset.  
When S1ADR and S1CON have been initialized, SIO1 waits until it  
is addressed by its own slave address followed by the data direction  
bit which must be “0” (W) for SIO1 to operate in the slave receiver  
mode. After its own slave address and the W bit have been  
received, the serial interrupt flag (I) is set and a valid status code  
can be read from S1STA. This status code is used to vector to an  
interrupt service routine, and the appropriate action to be taken for  
each of these status codes is detailed in Table 11. The slave  
receiver mode may also be entered if arbitration is lost while SIO1 is  
in the master mode (see status 68H and 78H).  
The master transmitter mode may now be entered by setting the  
STA bit using the SETB instruction. The SIO1 logic will now test the  
2
I C bus and generate a start condition as soon as the bus becomes  
free. When a START condition is transmitted, the serial interrupt flag  
(SI) is set, and the status code in the status register (S1STA) will be  
08H. This status code must be used to vector to an interrupt service  
routine that loads S1DAT with the slave address and the data  
direction bit (SLA+W). The SI bit in S1CON must then be reset  
before the serial transfer can continue.  
When the slave address and the direction bit have been transmitted  
and an acknowledgment bit has been received, the serial interrupt  
flag (SI) is set again, and a number of status codes in S1STA are  
possible. There are 18H, 20H, or 38H for the master mode and also  
68H, 78H, or B0H if the slave mode was enabled (AA = logic 1). The  
appropriate action to be taken for each of these status codes is  
detailed in Table 9. After a repeated start condition (state 10H). SIO1  
If the AA bit is reset during a transfer, SIO1 will return a not  
acknowledge (logic 1) to SDA after the next received data byte.  
While AA is reset, SIO1 does not respond to its own slave address  
2
or a general call address. However, the I C bus is still monitored  
and address recognition may be resumed at any time by setting AA.  
This means that the AA bit may be used to temporarily isolate SIO1  
2
from the I C bus.  
41  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
MT  
SUCCESSFUL TRANSMISSION  
TO A SLAVE RECEIVER  
S
SLA  
W
A
DATA  
A
P
28H  
08H  
18H  
NEXT TRANSFER STARTED WITH A REPEATED START CONDITION  
NOT ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIVED AFTER THE SLAVE ADDRESS  
S
SLA  
W
R
10H  
A
P
20H  
TO MST/REC MODE  
ENTRY = MR  
NOT ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIVED AFTER A DATA BYTE  
A
P
30H  
ARBITRATION LOST IN SLAVE ADDRESS OR DATA BYTE  
OTHER MST  
CONTINUES  
OTHER MST  
CONTINUES  
A or A  
38H  
A or A  
38H  
ARBITRATION LOST AND ADDRESSED AS SLAVE  
OTHER MST  
CONTINUES  
A
TO CORRESPONDING  
STATES IN SLAVE MODE  
68H  
78H  
80H  
FROM MASTER TO SLAVE  
FROM SLAVE TO MASTER  
Data  
n
A
ANY NUMBER OF DATA BYTES AND THEIR ASSOCIATED ACKNOWLEDGE BITS  
2
THIS NUMBER (CONTAINED IN S1STA) CORRESPONDS TO A DEFINED STATE OF THE I C BUS. SEE TABLE 9.  
SU00971  
Figure 22. Format and States in the Master Transmitter Mode  
42  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
MR  
SUCCESSFUL RECEPTION  
FROM A SLAVE TRANSMITTER  
S
SLA  
R
A
DATA  
A
DATA  
A
P
50H  
58H  
08H  
40H  
NEXT TRANSFER STARTED WITH A  
REPEATED START CONDITION  
S
SLA  
R
10H  
NOT ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIVED  
AFTER THE SLAVE ADDRESS  
A
P
W
48H  
TO MST/TRX MODE  
ENTRY = MT  
ARBITRATION LOST IN SLAVE ADDRESS  
OR ACKNOWLEDGE BIT  
OTHER MST  
CONTINUES  
OTHER MST  
CONTINUES  
A
A or A  
38H  
38H  
ARBITRATION LOST AND ADDRESSED AS SLAVE  
OTHER MST  
CONTINUES  
A
TO CORRESPONDING  
STATES IN SLAVE MODE  
68H  
78H  
80H  
FROM MASTER TO SLAVE  
FROM SLAVE TO MASTER  
ANY NUMBER OF DATA BYTES AND THEIR ASSOCIATED ACKNOWLEDGE BITS  
DATA  
n
A
2
THIS NUMBER (CONTAINED IN S1STA) CORRESPONDS TO A DEFINED STATE OF THE I C BUS. SEE TABLE 10.  
SU00972  
Figure 23. Format and States in the Master Receiver Mode  
43  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
RECEPTION OF THE OWN SLAVE ADDRESS  
AND ONE OR MORE DATA BYTES  
ALL ARE ACKNOWLEDGED.  
S
SLA  
W
A
DATA  
A
DATA  
A
P or S  
A0H  
80H  
80H  
60H  
LAST DATA BYTE RECEIVED IS  
NOT ACKNOWLEDGED  
P or S  
A
88H  
ARBITRATION LOST AS MST AND  
ADDRESSED AS SLAVE  
A
68H  
RECEPTION OF THE GENERAL CALL ADDRESS  
AND ONE OR MORE DATA BYTES  
GENERAL  
CALL  
DATA  
A
DATA  
A
A
P or S  
A0H  
90H  
90H  
70H  
LAST DATA BYTE IS NOT ACKNOWLEDGED  
P or S  
A
98H  
ARBITRATION LOST AS MST AND ADDRESSED AS SLAVE BY GENERAL CALL  
A
78H  
FROM MASTER TO SLAVE  
FROM SLAVE TO MASTER  
Data  
A
ANY NUMBER OF DATA BYTES AND THEIR ASSOCIATED ACKNOWLEDGE BITS  
2
n
THIS NUMBER (CONTAINED IN S1STA) CORRESPONDS TO A DEFINED STATE OF THE I C BUS. SEE TABLE 11.  
SU00973  
Figure 24. Format and States in the Slave Receiver Mode  
44  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
RECEPTION OF THE  
OWN SLAVE ADDRESS  
S
SLA  
R
A
DATA  
A
DATA  
A
P or S  
AND TRANSMISSION  
OF ONE OR MORE  
DATA BYTES  
B8H  
C0H  
A8H  
ARBITRATION LOST AS MST  
AND ADDRESSED AS SLAVE  
A
FROM MASTER TO SLAVE  
FROM SLAVE TO MASTER  
B0H  
LAST DATA BYTE TRANSMITTED.  
SWITCHED TO NOT ADDRESSED  
SLAVE (AA BIT IN S1CON = “0”  
P or S  
A
All “1”s  
C8H  
DATA  
n
A
ANY NUMBER OF DATA BYTES AND THEIR ASSOCIATED ACKNOWLEDGE BITS  
2
THIS NUMBER (CONTAINED IN S1STA) CORRESPONDS TO A DEFINED STATE OF THE I C BUS. SEE TABLE 12.  
SU00974  
Figure 25. Format and States of the Slave Transmitter Mode  
45  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
Table 9.  
Master Transmitter Mode  
APPLICATION SOFTWARE RESPONSE  
STATUS  
CODE  
(S1STA)  
STATUS OF THE  
I C BUS AND  
SIO1 HARDWARE  
2
TO S1CON  
NEXT ACTION TAKEN BY SIO1 HARDWARE  
TO/FROM S1DAT  
STA STO  
SI  
AA  
08H  
10H  
A START condition has  
been transmitted  
Load SLA+W  
X
0
0
X
SLA+W will be transmitted;  
ACK bit will be received  
Load SLA+W or  
Load SLA+R  
X
X
0
0
0
0
X
X
As above  
SLA+W will be transmitted;  
SIO1 will be switched to MST/REC mode  
A repeated START  
condition has been  
transmitted  
Load data byte or  
0
0
0
X
Data byte will be transmitted;  
ACK bit will be received  
Repeated START will be transmitted;  
STOP condition will be transmitted;  
STO flag will be reset  
STOP condition followed by a  
START condition will be transmitted;  
STO flag will be reset  
18H  
20H  
28H  
30H  
38H  
SLA+W has been  
transmitted; ACK has  
been received  
no S1DAT action or  
no S1DAT action or  
1
0
0
1
0
0
X
X
no S1DAT action  
1
1
0
X
Load data byte or  
0
0
0
X
Data byte will be transmitted;  
ACK bit will be received  
Repeated START will be transmitted;  
STOP condition will be transmitted;  
STO flag will be reset  
STOP condition followed by a  
START condition will be transmitted;  
STO flag will be reset  
SLA+W has been  
transmitted; NOT ACK  
has been received  
no S1DAT action or  
no S1DAT action or  
1
0
0
1
0
0
X
X
no S1DAT action  
1
1
0
X
Load data byte or  
0
0
0
X
Data byte will be transmitted;  
ACK bit will be received  
Repeated START will be transmitted;  
STOP condition will be transmitted;  
STO flag will be reset  
STOP condition followed by a  
START condition will be transmitted;  
STO flag will be reset  
Data byte in S1DAT has  
been transmitted; ACK  
has been received  
no S1DAT action or  
no S1DAT action or  
1
0
0
1
0
0
X
X
no S1DAT action  
1
1
0
X
Load data byte or  
0
0
0
X
Data byte will be transmitted;  
ACK bit will be received  
Repeated START will be transmitted;  
STOP condition will be transmitted;  
STO flag will be reset  
STOP condition followed by a  
START condition will be transmitted;  
STO flag will be reset  
Data byte in S1DAT has  
been transmitted; NOT  
ACK has been received  
no S1DAT action or  
no S1DAT action or  
1
0
0
1
0
0
X
X
no S1DAT action  
1
1
0
X
2
No S1DAT action or  
No S1DAT action  
0
1
0
0
0
0
X
X
I C bus will be released;  
Arbitration lost in  
SLA+R/W or  
Data bytes  
not addressed slave will be entered  
A START condition will be transmitted when the  
bus becomes free  
46  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
Table 10. Master Receiver Mode  
APPLICATION SOFTWARE RESPONSE  
2
STATUS  
CODE  
(S1STA)  
STATUS OF THE I C  
TO S1CON  
NEXT ACTION TAKEN BY SIO1 HARDWARE  
BUS AND  
TO/FROM S1DAT  
SIO1 HARDWARE  
STA STO  
SI  
AA  
08H  
10H  
A START condition has  
been transmitted  
Load SLA+R  
X
0
0
X
SLA+R will be transmitted;  
ACK bit will be received  
Load SLA+R or  
Load SLA+W  
X
X
0
0
0
0
X
X
As above  
SLA+W will be transmitted;  
SIO1 will be switched to MST/TRX mode  
A repeated START  
condition has been  
transmitted  
2
No S1DAT action or  
No S1DAT action  
0
1
0
0
0
0
X
X
I C bus will be released;  
38H  
40H  
48H  
Arbitration lost in  
NOT ACK bit  
SIO1 will enter a slave mode  
A START condition will be transmitted when the  
bus becomes free  
No S1DAT action or  
no S1DAT action  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
Data byte will be received;  
NOT ACK bit will be returned  
Data byte will be received;  
ACK bit will be returned  
SLA+R has been  
transmitted; ACK has  
been received  
No S1DAT action or  
no S1DAT action or  
1
0
0
1
0
0
X
X
Repeated START condition will be transmitted  
STOP condition will be transmitted;  
STO flag will be reset  
SLA+R has been  
transmitted; NOT ACK  
has been received  
no S1DAT action  
1
1
0
X
STOP condition followed by a  
START condition will be transmitted;  
STO flag will be reset  
Read data byte or  
read data byte  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
Data byte will be received;  
NOT ACK bit will be returned  
Data byte will be received;  
ACK bit will be returned  
50H  
58H  
Data byte has been  
received; ACK has been  
returned  
Read data byte or  
read data byte or  
1
0
0
1
0
0
X
X
Repeated START condition will be transmitted  
STOP condition will be transmitted;  
STO flag will be reset  
Data byte has been  
received; NOT ACK has  
been returned  
read data byte  
1
1
0
X
STOP condition followed by a  
START condition will be transmitted;  
STO flag will be reset  
47  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
Table 11. Slave Receiver Mode  
APPLICATION SOFTWARE RESPONSE  
STATUS  
CODE  
(S1STA)  
STATUS OF THE  
I C BUS AND  
SIO1 HARDWARE  
2
TO S1CON  
NEXT ACTION TAKEN BY SIO1 HARDWARE  
TO/FROM S1DAT  
STA STO  
SI  
AA  
No S1DAT action or  
X
0
0
0
Data byte will be received and NOT ACK will be  
returned  
Data byte will be received and ACK will be returned  
60H  
68H  
Own SLA+W has  
been received; ACK  
has been returned  
no S1DAT action  
X
X
0
0
0
0
1
0
No S1DAT action or  
Data byte will be received and NOT ACK will be  
returned  
Arbitration lost in  
SLA+R/W as master;  
Own SLA+W has  
been received, ACK  
returned  
no S1DAT action  
X
X
0
0
0
0
1
0
Data byte will be received and ACK will be returned  
No S1DAT action or  
Data byte will be received and NOT ACK will be  
returned  
70H  
78H  
General call address  
(00H) has been  
received; ACK has  
been returned  
no S1DAT action  
X
X
0
0
0
0
1
0
Data byte will be received and ACK will be returned  
No S1DAT action or  
Data byte will be received and NOT ACK will be  
returned  
Arbitration lost in  
SLA+R/W as master;  
General call address  
has been received,  
ACK has been  
no S1DAT action  
Read data byte or  
X
X
0
0
0
0
1
0
Data byte will be received and ACK will be returned  
returned  
Data byte will be received and NOT ACK will be  
returned  
80H  
88H  
Previously addressed  
with own SLV  
address; DATA has  
been received; ACK  
has been returned  
read data byte  
X
0
0
1
Data byte will be received and ACK will be returned  
Read data byte or  
read data byte or  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
Switched to not addressed SLV mode; no recognition  
of own SLA or General call address  
Switched to not addressed SLV mode; Own SLA will  
be recognized; General call address will be  
recognized if S1ADR.0 = logic 1  
Previously addressed  
with own SLA; DATA  
byte has been  
received; NOT ACK  
has been returned  
read data byte or  
read data byte  
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
Switched to not addressed SLV mode; no recognition  
of own SLA or General call address. A START  
condition will be transmitted when the bus becomes  
free  
Switched to not addressed SLV mode; Own SLA will  
be recognized; General call address will be  
recognized if S1ADR.0 = logic 1. A START condition  
will be transmitted when the bus becomes free.  
Read data byte or  
read data byte  
X
X
0
0
0
0
0
1
Data byte will be received and NOT ACK will be  
returned  
90H  
98H  
Previously addressed  
with General Call;  
DATA byte has been  
received; ACK has  
been returned  
Data byte will be received and ACK will be returned  
Read data byte or  
read data byte or  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
Switched to not addressed SLV mode; no recognition  
of own SLA or General call address  
Switched to not addressed SLV mode; Own SLA will  
be recognized; General call address will be  
recognized if S1ADR.0 = logic 1  
Previously addressed  
with General Call;  
DATA byte has been  
received; NOT ACK  
has been returned  
read data byte or  
read data byte  
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
Switched to not addressed SLV mode; no recognition  
of own SLA or General call address. A START  
condition will be transmitted when the bus becomes  
free  
Switched to not addressed SLV mode; Own SLA will  
be recognized; General call address will be  
recognized if S1ADR.0 = logic 1. A START condition  
will be transmitted when the bus becomes free.  
48  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
Table 11. Slave Receiver Mode (Continued)  
APPLICATION SOFTWARE RESPONSE  
STATUS  
CODE  
(S1STA)  
STATUS OF THE  
I C BUS AND  
SIO1 HARDWARE  
2
TO S1CON  
NEXT ACTION TAKEN BY SIO1 HARDWARE  
TO/FROM S1DAT  
STA STO  
SI  
AA  
No STDAT action or  
No STDAT action or  
0
0
0
0
0
0
Switched to not addressed SLV mode; no recognition  
of own SLA or General call address  
Switched to not addressed SLV mode; Own SLA will  
be recognized; General call address will be  
recognized if S1ADR.0 = logic 1  
Switched to not addressed SLV mode; no recognition  
of own SLA or General call address. A START  
condition will be transmitted when the bus becomes  
free  
Switched to not addressed SLV mode; Own SLA will  
be recognized; General call address will be  
A0H  
A STOP condition or  
repeated START  
condition has been  
received while still  
addressed as  
0
0
1
0
SLV/REC or SLV/TRX  
No STDAT action or  
No STDAT action  
1
1
0
0
0
1
recognized if S1ADR.0 = logic 1. A START condition  
will be transmitted when the bus becomes free.  
Table 12. Slave Transmitter Mode  
APPLICATION SOFTWARE RESPONSE  
STATUS  
CODE  
(S1STA)  
STATUS OF THE  
I C BUS AND  
SIO1 HARDWARE  
2
TO S1CON  
NEXT ACTION TAKEN BY SIO1 HARDWARE  
TO/FROM S1DAT  
STA STO  
SI  
AA  
Load data byte or  
X
0
0
0
Last data byte will be transmitted and ACK bit will be  
received  
Data byte will be transmitted; ACK will be received  
A8H  
B0H  
Own SLA+R has  
been received; ACK  
has been returned  
load data byte  
X
X
0
0
0
0
1
0
Load data byte or  
Last data byte will be transmitted and ACK bit will be  
received  
Arbitration lost in  
SLA+R/W as master;  
Own SLA+R has  
been received, ACK  
has been returned  
load data byte  
X
X
0
0
0
0
1
0
Data byte will be transmitted; ACK bit will be received  
Load data byte or  
Last data byte will be transmitted and ACK bit will be  
received  
B8H  
C0H  
Data byte in S1DAT  
has been transmitted;  
ACK has been  
load data byte  
X
0
0
0
0
0
1
Data byte will be transmitted; ACK bit will be received  
received  
No S1DAT action or  
01 Switched to not addressed SLV mode; no recognition  
of own SLA or General call address  
1
Data byte in S1DAT  
has been transmitted;  
NOT ACK has been  
received  
no S1DAT action or  
no S1DAT action or  
0
1
0
0
0
0
Switched to not addressed SLV mode; Own SLA will  
be recognized; General call address will be  
recognized if S1ADR.0 = logic 1  
Switched to not addressed SLV mode; no recognition  
of own SLA or General call address. A START  
condition will be transmitted when the bus becomes  
free  
0
no S1DAT action  
1
0
0
1
Switched to not addressed SLV mode; Own SLA will  
be recognized; General call address will be  
recognized if S1ADR.0 = logic 1. A START condition  
will be transmitted when the bus becomes free.  
No S1DAT action or  
no S1DAT action or  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
Switched to not addressed SLV mode; no recognition  
of own SLA or General call address  
Switched to not addressed SLV mode; Own SLA will  
be recognized; General call address will be  
recognized if S1ADR.0 = logic 1  
C8H  
Last data byte in  
S1DAT has been  
transmitted (AA = 0);  
ACK has been  
received  
no S1DAT action or  
no S1DAT action  
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
Switched to not addressed SLV mode; no recognition  
of own SLA or General call address. A START  
condition will be transmitted when the bus becomes  
free  
Switched to not addressed SLV mode; Own SLA will  
be recognized; General call address will be  
recognized if S1ADR.0 = logic 1. A START condition  
will be transmitted when the bus becomes free.  
49  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
Table 13. Miscellaneous States  
APPLICATION SOFTWARE RESPONSE  
STATUS  
CODE  
(S1STA)  
STATUS OF THE  
I C BUS AND  
SIO1 HARDWARE  
2
TO S1CON  
NEXT ACTION TAKEN BY SIO1 HARDWARE  
TO/FROM S1DAT  
STA STO  
SI  
AA  
F8H  
00H  
No relevant state  
information available;  
SI = 0  
No S1DAT action  
No S1CON action  
Wait or proceed current transfer  
Bus error during MST No S1DAT action  
or selected slave  
modes, due to an  
0
1
0
X
Only the internal hardware is affected in the MST or  
addressed SLV modes. In all cases, the bus is  
released and SIO1 is switched to the not addressed  
SLV mode. STO is reset.  
illegal START or  
STOP condition. State  
00H can also occur  
when interference  
causes SIO1 to enter  
an undefined state.  
Slave Transmitter Mode: In the slave transmitter mode, a number  
of data bytes are transmitted to a master receiver (see Figure 25).  
Data transfer is initialized as in the slave receiver mode. When  
S1ADR and S1CON have been initialized, SIO1 waits until it is  
addressed by its own slave address followed by the data direction  
bit which must be “1” (R) for SIO1 to operate in the slave transmitter  
mode. After its own slave address and the R bit have been received,  
the serial interrupt flag (SI) is set and a valid status code can be  
read from S1STA. This status code is used to vector to an interrupt  
service routine, and the appropriate action to be taken for each of  
these status codes is detailed in Table 12. The slave transmitter  
mode may also be entered if arbitration is lost while SIO1 is in the  
master mode (see state B0H).  
SDA and SCL lines are released (a STOP condition is not  
transmitted).  
Some Special Cases: The SIO1 hardware has facilities to handle  
the following special cases that may occur during a serial transfer:  
Simultaneous Repeated START Conditions from Two Masters  
A repeated START condition may be generated in the master  
transmitter or master receiver modes. A special case occurs if  
another master simultaneously generates a repeated START  
condition (see Figure 26). Until this occurs, arbitration is not lost by  
either master since they were both transmitting the same data.  
2
If the SIO1 hardware detects a repeated START condition on the I C  
bus before generating a repeated START condition itself, it will  
release the bus, and no interrupt request is generated. If another  
master frees the bus by generating a STOP condition, SIO1 will  
transmit a normal START condition (state 08H), and a retry of the  
total serial data transfer can commence.  
If the AA bit is reset during a transfer, SIO1 will transmit the last byte  
of the transfer and enter state C0H or C8H. SIO1 is switched to the  
not addressed slave mode and will ignore the master receiver if it  
continues the transfer. Thus the master receiver receives all 1s as  
serial data. While AA is reset, SIO1 does not respond to its own  
2
slave address or a general call address. However, the I C bus is still  
DATA TRANSFER AFTER LOSS OF ARBITRATION  
monitored, and address recognition may be resumed at any time by  
setting AA. This means that the AA bit may be used to temporarily  
isolate SIO1 from the I C bus.  
Arbitration may be lost in the master transmitter and master receiver  
modes (see Figure 18). Loss of arbitration is indicated by the  
following states in S1STA; 38H, 68H, 78H, and B0H (see Figures 22  
and 23).  
2
Miscellaneous States: There are two S1STA codes that do not  
correspond to a defined SIO1 hardware state (see Table 13). These  
are discussed below.  
If the STA flag in S1CON is set by the routines which service these  
states, then, if the bus is free again, a START condition (state 08H)  
is transmitted without intervention by the CPU, and a retry of the  
total serial transfer can commence.  
S1STA = F8H:  
This status code indicates that no relevant information is available  
because the serial interrupt flag, SI, is not yet set. This occurs  
between other states and when SIO1 is not involved in a serial  
transfer.  
FORCED ACCESS TO THE I2C BUS  
In some applications, it may be possible for an uncontrolled source  
to cause a bus hang-up. In such situations, the problem may be  
caused by interference, temporary interruption of the bus or a  
temporary short-circuit between SDA and SCL.  
S1STA = 00H:  
This status code indicates that a bus error has occurred during an  
SIO1 serial transfer. A bus error is caused when a START or STOP  
condition occurs at an illegal position in the format frame. Examples  
of such illegal positions are during the serial transfer of an address  
byte, a data byte, or an acknowledge bit. A bus error may also be  
caused when external interference disturbs the internal SIO1  
signals. When a bus error occurs, SI is set. To recover from a bus  
error, the STO flag must be set and SI must be cleared. This causes  
SIO1 to enter the “not addressed” slave mode (a defined state) and  
to clear the STO flag (no other bits in S1CON are affected). The  
If an uncontrolled source generates a superfluous START or masks  
a STOP condition, then the I C bus stays busy indefinitely. If the  
2
STA flag is set and bus access is not obtained within a reasonable  
2
amount of time, then a forced access to the I C bus is possible. This  
is achieved by setting the STO flag while the STA flag is still set. No  
STOP condition is transmitted. The SIO1 hardware behaves as if a  
STOP condition was received and is able to transmit a START  
condition. The STO flag is cleared by hardware (see Figure 27).  
50  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
BOTH MASTERS CONTINUE  
WITH SLA TRANSMISSION  
S
SLA  
W
A
DATA  
A
S
08H  
18H  
28H  
OTHER MASTER SENDS REPEATED  
START CONDITION EARLIER  
SU00975  
Figure 26. Simultaneous Repeated START Conditions from 2 Masters  
TIME OUT  
STA FLAG  
SDA LINE  
SCL LINE  
START CONDITION  
SU00976  
2
Figure 27. Forced Access to a Busy I C Bus  
I2C BUS OBSTRUCTED BY A LOW LEVEL ON SCL OR SDA  
An I C bus hang-up occurs if SDA or SCL is pulled LOW by an  
uncontrolled source. If the SCL line is obstructed (pulled LOW) by a  
device on the bus, no further serial transfer is possible, and the  
SIO1 hardware cannot resolve this type of problem. When this  
occurs, the problem must be resolved by the device that is pulling  
the SCL bus line LOW.  
hardware performs the same action as described above. In each  
case, state 08H is entered after a successful START condition is  
transmitted and normal serial transfer continues. Note that the CPU  
is not involved in solving these bus hang-up problems.  
2
BUS ERROR  
A bus error occurs when a START or STOP condition is present at  
an illegal position in the format frame. Examples of illegal positions  
are during the serial transfer of an address byte, a data or an  
acknowledge bit.  
If the SDA line is obstructed by another device on the bus (e.g., a  
slave device out of bit synchronization), the problem can be solved  
by transmitting additional clock pulses on the SCL line (see Figure  
28). The SIO1 hardware transmits additional clock pulses when the  
STA flag is set, but no START condition can be generated because  
The SIO1 hardware only reacts to a bus error when it is involved in  
a serial transfer either as a master or an addressed slave. When a  
bus error is detected, SIO1 immediately switches to the not  
addressed slave mode, releases the SDA and SCL lines, sets the  
interrupt flag, and loads the status register with 00H. This status  
code may be used to vector to a service routine which either  
attempts the aborted serial transfer again or simply recovers from  
the error condition as shown in Table 13.  
2
the SDA line is pulled LOW while the I C bus is considered free.  
The SIO1 hardware attempts to generate a START condition after  
every two additional clock pulses on the SCL line. When the SDA  
line is eventually released, a normal START condition is transmitted,  
state 08H is entered, and the serial transfer continues.  
If a forced bus access occurs or a repeated START condition is  
transmitted while SDA is obstructed (pulled LOW), the SIO1  
51  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
STA FLAG  
(2)  
(3)  
(1)  
(1)  
SDA LINE  
SCL LINE  
START CONDITION  
(1) Unsuccessful attempt to send a Start condition  
(2) SDA line released  
(3) Successful attempt to send a Start condition; state 08H is entered  
SU00977  
Figure 28. Recovering from a Bus Obstruction Caused by a Low Level on SDA  
Software Examples of SIO1 Service Routines: This section  
SIO1 INTERRUPT ROUTINE  
consists of a software example for:  
– Initialization of SIO1 after a RESET  
When the SIO1 interrupt is entered, the PSW is first pushed on the  
stack. Then S1STA and HADD (loaded with the high-order address  
byte of the 26 service routines by the initialization routine) are  
pushed on to the stack. S1STA contains a status code which is the  
lower byte of one of the 26 service routines. The next instruction is  
RET, which is the return from subroutine instruction. When this  
instruction is executed, the HIGH and LOW order address bytes are  
popped from stack and loaded into the program counter.  
– Entering the SIO1 interrupt routine  
– The 26 state service routines for the  
– Master transmitter mode  
– Master receiver mode  
– Slave receiver mode  
– Slave transmitter mode  
The next instruction to be executed is the first instruction of the state  
service routine. Seven bytes of program code (which execute in  
eight machine cycles) are required to branch to one of the 26 state  
service routines.  
INITIALIZATION  
In the initialization routine, SIO1 is enabled for both master and  
slave modes. For each mode, a number of bytes of internal data  
RAM are allocated to the SIO to act as either a transmission or  
reception buffer. In this example, 8 bytes of internal data RAM are  
reserved for different purposes. The data memory map is shown in  
Figure 29. The initialization routine performs the following functions:  
– S1ADR is loaded with the part’s own slave address and the  
general call bit (GC)  
SI  
PUSH PSW  
Save PSW  
PUSH S1STA  
Push status code  
(LOW order address byte)  
Push HIGH order address byte  
Jump to state service routine  
PUSH HADD  
RET  
The state service routines are located in a 256-byte page of program  
memory. The location of this page is defined in the initialization  
routine. The page can be located anywhere in program memory by  
loading data RAM register HADD with the page number. Page 01 is  
chosen in this example, and the service routines are located  
between addresses 0100H and 01FFH.  
– P1.6 and P1.7 bit latches are loaded with logic 1s  
– RAM location HADD is loaded with the high-order address byte of  
the service routines  
– The SIO1 interrupt enable and interrupt priority bits are set  
– The slave mode is enabled by simultaneously setting the ENS1  
and AA bits in S1CON and the serial clock frequency (for master  
modes) is defined by loading CR0 and CR1 in S1CON. The  
master routines must be started in the main program.  
THE STATE SERVICE ROUTINES  
The state service routines are located 8 bytes from each other. Eight  
bytes of code are sufficient for most of the service routines. A few of  
the routines require more than 8 bytes and have to jump to other  
locations to obtain more bytes of code. Each state routine is part of  
the SIO1 interrupt routine and handles one of the 26 states. It ends  
with a RETI instruction which causes a return to the main program.  
2
The SIO1 hardware now begins checking the I C bus for its own  
slave address and general call. If the general call or the own slave  
address is detected, an interrupt is requested and S1STA is loaded  
with the appropriate state information. The following text describes a  
fast method of branching to the appropriate service routine.  
52  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
SPECIAL FUNCTION REGISTERS  
S1ADR  
S1DAT  
S1STA  
GC  
DB  
DA  
0
0
0
D9  
D8  
S1CON  
CR2  
ENS1 STA  
ST0  
SI  
AA  
CR!  
CR0  
PSW  
D0  
B8  
IPO  
IEN0  
P1  
PS1  
ES1  
AB  
EA  
90  
80  
P1.7  
P1.6  
INTERNAL DATA RAM  
7F  
BACKUP  
ORIGINAL VALUE OF NUMBYTMST  
53  
52  
51  
NUMBYTMST  
SLA  
NUMBER OF BYTES AS MASTER  
SLA+R/W TO BE TRANSMITTED TO SLA  
50  
4F  
HADD  
HIGHER ADDRESS BYTE INTERRUPT ROUTINE  
SLAVE TRANSMITTER DATA RAM  
48  
STD  
SLAVE RECEIVER DATA RAM  
MASTER RECEIVER DATA RAM  
MASTER TRANSMITTER DATA RAM  
40  
38  
30  
SRD  
MRD  
MTD  
R1  
R0  
19  
18  
00  
SU00978  
Figure 29. SIO1 Data Memory Map  
53  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
2
MASTER TRANSMITTER AND MASTER RECEIVER MODES  
occurs, the I C bus is released and SIO1 enters the not selected  
slave receiver mode.  
The master mode is entered in the main program. To enter the  
master transmitter mode, the main program must first load the  
internal data RAM with the slave address, data bytes, and the  
number of data bytes to be transmitted. To enter the master receiver  
mode, the main program must first load the internal data RAM with  
the slave address and the number of data bytes to be received. The  
R/W bit determines whether SIO1 operates in the master transmitter  
or master receiver mode.  
In the slave receiver mode, a maximum of 8 received data bytes can  
be stored in the internal data RAM. A maximum of 8 bytes ensures  
that other RAM locations are not overwritten if a master sends more  
bytes. If more than 8 bytes are transmitted, a not acknowledge is  
returned, and SIO1 enters the not addressed slave receiver mode. A  
maximum of one received data byte can be stored in the internal  
data RAM after a general call address is detected. If more than one  
byte is transmitted, a not acknowledge is returned and SIO1 enters  
the not addressed slave receiver mode.  
Master mode operation commences when the STA bit in S1CION is  
set by the SETB instruction and data transfer is controlled by the  
master state service routines in accordance with Table 9, Table 10,  
Figure 22, and Figure 23. In the example below, 4 bytes are  
transferred. There is no repeated START condition. In the event of  
lost arbitration, the transfer is restarted when the bus becomes free.  
In the slave transmitter mode, data to be transmitted is obtained  
from the same locations in the internal data RAM that were  
previously loaded by the main program. After a not acknowledge  
has been returned by a master receiver device, SIO1 enters the not  
addressed slave mode.  
2
If a bus error occurs, the I C bus is released and SIO1 enters the  
not selected slave receiver mode. If a slave device returns a not  
acknowledge, a STOP condition is generated.  
ADAPTING THE SOFTWARE FOR DIFFERENT APPLICATIONS  
The following software example shows the typical structure of the  
interrupt routine including the 26 state service routines and may be  
used as a base for user applications. If one or more of the four  
modes are not used, the associated state service routines may be  
removed but, care should be taken that a deleted routine can never  
be invoked.  
A repeated START condition can be included in the serial transfer if  
the STA flag is set instead of the STO flag in the state service  
routines vectored to by status codes 28H and 58H. Additional  
software must be written to determine which data is transferred after  
a repeated START condition.  
SLAVE TRANSMITTER AND SLAVE RECEIVER MODES  
2
This example does not include any time-out routines. In the slave  
modes, time-out routines are not very useful since, in these modes,  
SIO1 behaves essentially as a passive device. In the master modes,  
an internal timer may be used to cause a time-out if a serial transfer  
is not complete after a defined period of time. This time period is  
After initialization, SIO1 continually tests the I C bus and branches  
to one of the slave state service routines if it detects its own slave  
address or the general call address (see Table 11, Table 12, Figure  
24, and Figure 25). If arbitration was lost while in the master mode,  
the master mode is restarted after the current transfer. If a bus error  
2
defined by the system connected to the I C bus.  
54  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
!********************************************************************************************************  
! SIO1 EQUATE LIST  
!********************************************************************************************************  
!********************************************************************************************************  
! LOCATIONS OF THE SIO1 SPECIAL FUNCTION REGISTERS  
!********************************************************************************************************  
00D8  
00D9  
00DA  
00DB  
S1CON  
S1STA  
S1DAT  
S1ADR  
–0xd8  
–0xd9  
–0xda  
–0xdb  
00A8  
00B8  
IEN0  
IP0  
–0xa8  
–02b8  
!********************************************************************************************************  
! BIT LOCATIONS  
!********************************************************************************************************  
00DD  
00BD  
STA  
SIO1HP  
–0xdd  
–0xbd  
! STA bit in S1CON  
! IP0, SIO1 Priority bit  
!********************************************************************************************************  
! IMMEDIATE DATA TO WRITE INTO REGISTER S1CON  
!********************************************************************************************************  
00D5  
00C5  
00C1  
00E5  
ENS1_NOTSTA_STO_NOTSI_AA_CR0  
ENS1_NOTSTA_NOTSTO_NOTSI_AA_CR0  
ENS1_NOTSTA_NOTSTO_NOTSI_NOTAA_CR0  
ENS1_STA_NOTSTO_NOTSI_AA_CR0  
–0xd5  
–0xc5  
–0xc1  
–0xe5  
! Generates STOP  
! (CR0 = 100kHz)  
! Releases BUS and  
! ACK  
! Releases BUS and  
! NOT ACK  
! Releases BUS and  
! set STA  
!********************************************************************************************************  
! GENERAL IMMEDIATE DATA  
!********************************************************************************************************  
0031  
00A0  
OWNSLA –0x31  
! Own SLA+General Call  
! must be written into S1ADR  
! EA+ES1, enable SIO1 interrupt  
! must be written into IEN0  
! select PAG1 as HADD  
! SLA+W to be transmitted  
! SLA+R to be transmitted  
! Select Register Bank 3  
ENSIO1  
–0xa0  
0001  
00C0  
00C1  
0018  
PAG1  
SLAW  
SLAR  
–0x01  
–0xc0  
–0xc1  
SELRB3 –0x18  
!********************************************************************************************************  
! LOCATIONS IN DATA RAM  
!********************************************************************************************************  
0030  
0038  
0040  
0048  
MTD  
MRD  
SRD  
STD  
–0x30  
–0x38  
–0x40  
–0x48  
! MST/TRX/DATA base address  
! MST/REC/DATA base address  
! SLV/REC/DATA base address  
! SLV/TRX/DATA base address  
0053  
BACKUP  
–0x53  
! Backup from NUMBYTMST  
! To restore NUMBYTMST in case  
! of an Arbitration Loss.  
! Number of bytes to transmit  
! or receive as MST.  
! Contains SLA+R/W to be  
! transmitted.  
! High Address byte for STATE 0  
! till STATE 25.  
0052  
0051  
0050  
NUMBYTMST –0x52  
SLA  
–0x51  
–0x50  
HADD  
55  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
!********************************************************************************************************  
! INITIALIZATION ROUTINE  
! Example to initialize IIC Interface as slave receiver or slave transmitter and  
! start a MASTER TRANSMIT or a MASTER RECEIVE function. 4 bytes will be transmitted or received.  
!********************************************************************************************************  
.sect  
strt  
.base  
0x00  
0000  
0200  
4100  
ajmp INIT  
! RESET  
.sect  
.base  
INIT:  
initial  
0x200  
75DB31  
mov S1ADR,#OWNSLA  
! Load own SLA + enable  
! general call recognition  
! P1.6 High level.  
0203  
0205  
0207  
020A  
020D  
020F  
D296  
D297  
755001  
43A8A0  
C2BD  
setb P1(6)  
setb P1(7)  
mov HADD,#PAG1  
! P1.7 High level.  
orl  
clr  
IEN0,#ENSIO1  
SIO1HP  
! Enable SIO1 interrupt  
! SIO1 interrupt LOW priority  
75D8C5  
mov S1CON, #ENS1_NOTSTA_NOTSTO_NOTSI_AA_CR0  
! Initialize SLV funct.  
!********************************************************************************************************  
!– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –  
! START MASTER TRANSMIT FUNCTION  
!– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –  
0212  
0215  
0218  
755204  
7551C0  
D2DD  
mov NUMBYTMST,#0x4  
mov SLA,#SLAW  
setb STA  
! Transmit 4 bytes.  
! SLA+W, Transmit funct.  
! set STA in S1CON  
!– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –  
! START MASTER RECEIVE FUNCTION  
!– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –  
021A  
021D  
0220  
755204  
7551C1  
D2DD  
mov NUMBYTMST,#0x4  
mov SLA,#SLAR  
setb STA  
! Receive 4 bytes.  
! SLA+R, Receive funct.  
! set STA in S1CON  
!********************************************************************************************************  
! SIO1 INTERRUPT ROUTINE  
!********************************************************************************************************  
.sect  
.base  
intvec  
0x00  
! SIO1 interrupt vector  
! S1STA and HADD are pushed onto the stack.  
! They serve as return address for the RET instruction.  
! The RET instruction sets the Program Counter to address HADD,  
! S1STA and jumps to the right subroutine.  
002B  
002D  
002F  
0031  
C0D0  
C0D9  
C050  
22  
push psw  
push S1STA  
push HADD  
ret  
! save psw  
! JMP to address HADD,S1STA.  
!– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –  
! STATE : 00, Bus error.  
! ACTION : Enter not addressed SLV mode and release bus. STO reset.  
!– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –  
.sect  
st0  
.base  
0x100  
0100  
75D8D5  
mov S1CON,#ENS1_NOTSTA_STO_NOTSI_AA_CR0 ! clr SI  
! set STO,AA  
0103  
0105  
D0D0  
32  
pop psw  
reti  
56  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
!********************************************************************************************************  
!********************************************************************************************************  
! MASTER STATE SERVICE ROUTINES  
!********************************************************************************************************  
! State 08 and State 10 are both for MST/TRX and MST/REC.  
! The R/W bit decides whether the next state is within  
! MST/TRX mode or within MST/REC mode.  
!********************************************************************************************************  
!– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –  
! STATE  
: 08, A, START condition has been transmitted.  
! ACTION : SLA+R/W are transmitted, ACK bit is received.  
!– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –  
.sect  
mts8  
.base  
0x108  
0108  
010B  
8551DA  
75D8C5  
mov S1DAT,SLA  
mov S1CON,#ENS1_NOTSTA_NOTSTO_NOTSI_AA_CR0  
! Load SLA+R/W  
! clr SI  
010E  
01A0  
ajmp INITBASE1  
!– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –  
! STATE  
!
: 10, A repeated START condition has been  
transmitted.  
! ACTION : SLA+R/W are transmitted, ACK bit is received.  
!– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –  
.sect  
.base  
mts10  
0x110  
0110  
0113  
8551DA  
75D8C5  
mov S1DAT,SLA  
mov S1CON,#ENS1_NOTSTA_NOTSTO_NOTSI_AA_CR0  
! Load SLA+R/W  
! clr SI  
010E  
01A0  
ajmp INITBASE1  
.sect  
.base  
ibase1  
0xa0  
00A0  
00A3  
00A5  
00A7  
00AA  
00AC  
75D018  
7930  
7838  
855253  
D0D0  
32  
INITBASE1:  
mov psw,#SELRB3  
mov r1,#MTD  
mov r0,#MRD  
mov BACKUP,NUMBYTMST  
pop psw  
reti  
! Save initial value  
!********************************************************************************************************  
!********************************************************************************************************  
! MASTER TRANSMITTER STATE SERVICE ROUTINES  
!********************************************************************************************************  
!********************************************************************************************************  
!– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –  
! STATE  
!
: 18, Previous state was STATE 8 or STATE 10, SLA+W have been transmitted,  
ACK has been received.  
! ACTION : First DATA is transmitted, ACK bit is received.  
!– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –  
.sect  
.base  
mts18  
0x118  
0118  
011B  
011D  
75D018  
87DA  
01B5  
mov psw,#SELRB3  
mov S1DAT,@r1  
ajmp CON  
57  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
!– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –  
! STATE : 20, SLA+W have been transmitted, NOT ACK has been received  
! ACTION : Transmit STOP condition.  
!– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –  
.sect  
.base  
mts20  
0x120  
0120  
75D8D5  
mov S1CON,#ENS1_NOTSTA_STO_NOTSI_AA_CR0  
! set STO, clr SI  
0123  
0125  
D0D0  
32  
pop psw  
reti  
!– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –  
! STATE : 28, DATA of S1DAT have been transmitted, ACK received.  
! ACTION : If Transmitted DATA is last DATA then transmit a STOP condition,  
else transmit next DATA.  
!– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –  
!
.sect  
.base  
mts28  
0x128  
0128  
012B  
D55285  
75D8D5  
djnz NUMBYTMST,NOTLDAT1  
mov S1CON,#ENS1_NOTSTA_STO_NOTSI_AA_CR0  
! JMP if NOT last DATA  
! clr SI, set AA  
012E  
01B9  
ajmp RETmt  
.sect  
.base  
mts28sb  
0x0b0  
00B0  
00B3  
00B5  
75D018  
87DA  
75D8C5  
NOTLDAT1:  
mov psw,#SELRB3  
mov S1DAT,@r1  
mov S1CON,#ENS1_NOTSTA_NOTSTO_NOTSI_AA_CR0  
! clr SI, set AA  
CON:  
00B8  
00B9  
00BB  
09  
D0D0  
32  
inc  
pop psw  
reti  
r1  
RETmt  
:
!– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –  
! STATE : 30, DATA of S1DAT have been transmitted, NOT ACK received.  
! ACTION : Transmit a STOP condition.  
!– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –  
.sect  
.base  
mts30  
0x130  
0130  
75D8D5  
mov S1CON,#ENS1_NOTSTA_STO_NOTSI_AA_CR0  
! set STO, clr SI  
0133  
0135  
D0D0  
32  
pop psw  
reti  
!– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –  
! STATE : 38, Arbitration lost in SLA+W or DATA.  
! ACTION : Bus is released, not addressed SLV mode is entered.  
A new START condition is transmitted when the IIC bus is free again.  
!– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –  
!
.sect  
.base  
mts38  
0x138  
0138  
013B  
013E  
75D8E5  
855352  
01B9  
mov S1CON,#ENS1_STA_NOTSTO_NOTSI_AA_CR0  
mov NUMBYTMST,BACKUP  
ajmp RETmt  
58  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
!********************************************************************************************************  
!********************************************************************************************************  
! MASTER RECEIVER STATE SERVICE ROUTINES  
!********************************************************************************************************  
!********************************************************************************************************  
!– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –  
! STATE  
!
: 40, Previous state was STATE 08 or STATE 10,  
SLA+R have been transmitted, ACK received.  
! ACTION : DATA will be received, ACK returned.  
!– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –  
.sect  
.base  
mts40  
0x140  
0140  
0143  
75D8C5  
mov S1CON,#ENS1_NOTSTA_NOTSTO_NOTSI_AA_CR0  
! clr STA, STO, SI set AA  
pop psw  
reti  
D0D0  
32  
!– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –  
! STATE : 48, SLA+R have been transmitted, NOT ACK received.  
! ACTION : STOP condition will be generated.  
!– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –  
.sect  
.base  
mts48  
0x148  
0148  
75D8D5  
STOP:  
mov S1CON,#ENS1_NOTSTA_STO_NOTSI_AA_CR0  
! set STO, clr SI  
014B  
014D  
D0D0  
32  
pop psw  
reti  
!– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –  
! STATE : 50, DATA have been received, ACK returned.  
! ACTION : Read DATA of S1DAT.  
DATA will be received, if it is last DATA  
then NOT ACK will be returned else ACK will be returned.  
!– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –  
!
.sect  
.base  
mrs50  
0x150  
0150  
0153  
0155  
75D018  
A6DA  
01C0  
mov psw,#SELRB3  
mov @r0,S1DAT  
ajmp REC1  
! Read received DATA  
.sect  
.base  
mrs50s  
0xc0  
00C0  
00C3  
D55205  
75D8C1  
REC1:  
djnz NUMBYTMST,NOTLDAT2  
mov S1CON,#ENS1_NOTSTA_NOTSTO_NOTSI_NOTAA_CR0  
! clr SI,AA  
00C6  
00C8  
8003  
75D8C5  
sjmp RETmr  
NOTLDAT2:  
RETmr:  
mov S1CON,#ENS1_NOTSTA_NOTSTO_NOTSI_AA_CR0  
! clr SI, set AA  
00CB  
08  
inc  
r0  
00CC D0D0  
pop psw  
reti  
00CE  
32  
!– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –  
! STATE : 58, DATA have been received, NOT ACK returned.  
! ACTION : Read DATA of S1DAT and generate a STOP condition.  
!– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –  
.sect  
.base  
mrs58  
0x158  
0158  
015B  
015D  
75D018  
A6DA  
80E9  
mov psw,#SELRB3  
mov @R0,S1DAT  
sjmp STOP  
59  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
!********************************************************************************************************  
!********************************************************************************************************  
! SLAVE RECEIVER STATE SERVICE ROUTINES  
!********************************************************************************************************  
!********************************************************************************************************  
!– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –  
! STATE  
: 60, Own SLA+W have been received, ACK returned.  
! ACTION : DATA will be received and ACK returned.  
!– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –  
.sect  
srs60  
.base  
0x160  
0160  
75D8C5  
mov S1CON,#ENS1_NOTSTA_NOTSTO_NOTSI_AA_CR0  
! clr SI, set AA  
0163  
0166  
75D018  
01D0  
mov psw,#SELRB3  
ajmp INITSRD  
.sect  
.base  
insrd  
0xd0  
00D0  
00D2  
00D4  
00D6  
7840  
7908  
D0D0  
32  
INITSRD:  
mov r0,#SRD  
mov r1,#8  
pop psw  
reti  
!– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –  
! STATE  
!
: 68, Arbitration lost in SLA and R/W as MST  
Own SLA+W have been received, ACK returned  
! ACTION : DATA will be received and ACK returned.  
STA is set to restart MST mode after the bus is free again.  
!– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –  
!
.sect  
srs68  
.base  
0x168  
0168  
016B  
016E  
75D8E5  
75D018  
01D0  
mov S1CON,#ENS1_STA_NOTSTO_NOTSI_AA_CR0  
mov psw,#SELRB3  
ajmp INITSRD  
!– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –  
! STATE : 70, General call has been received, ACK returned.  
! ACTION : DATA will be received and ACK returned.  
!– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –  
.sect  
srs70  
.base  
0x170  
0170  
75D8C5  
mov S1CON,#ENS1_NOTSTA_NOTSTO_NOTSI_AA_CR0  
! clr SI, set AA  
0173  
0176  
75D018  
01D0  
mov psw,#SELRB3  
ajmp initsrd  
! Initialize SRD counter  
!– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –  
! STATE  
!
: 78, Arbitration lost in SLA+R/W as MST.  
General call has been received, ACK returned.  
! ACTION : DATA will be received and ACK returned.  
STA is set to restart MST mode after the bus is free again.  
!– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –  
!
.sect  
srs78  
.base  
0x178  
0178  
017B  
017E  
75D8E5  
75D018  
01D0  
mov S1CON,#ENS1_STA_NOTSTO_NOTSI_AA_CR0  
mov psw,#SELRB3  
ajmp INITSRD  
! Initialize SRD counter  
60  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
!– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –  
! STATE : 80, Previously addressed with own SLA. DATA received, ACK returned.  
! ACTION : Read DATA.  
!
!
IF received DATA was the last  
THEN superfluous DATA will be received and NOT ACK returned  
ELSE next DATA will be received and ACK returned.  
!– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –  
.sect  
srs80  
.base  
0x180  
0180  
0183  
0185  
75D018  
A6DA  
01D8  
mov psw,#SELRB3  
mov @r0,S1DAT  
ajmp REC2  
! Read received DATA  
.sect  
.base  
srs80s  
0xd8  
00D8  
00DA  
D906  
75D8C1  
REC2:  
LDAT:  
djnz r1,NOTLDAT3  
mov S1CON,#ENS1_NOTSTA_NOTSTO_NOTSI_NOTAA_CR0  
! clr SI,AA  
00DD D0D0  
pop psw  
00DF  
00E0  
32  
75D8C5  
reti  
NOTLDAT3:  
RETsr:  
mov S1CON,#ENS1_NOTSTA_NOTSTO_NOTSI_AA_CR0  
! clr SI, set AA  
inc  
pop psw  
reti  
00E3  
00E4  
00E6  
08  
D0D0  
32  
r0  
!– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –  
! STATE : 88, Previously addressed with own SLA. DATA received NOT ACK returned.  
! ACTION : No save of DATA, Enter NOT addressed SLV mode.  
Recognition of own SLA. General call recognized, if S1ADR. 0–1.  
!– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –  
!
.sect  
srs88  
.base  
0x188  
0188  
018B  
75D8C5  
01E4  
mov S1CON,#ENS1_NOTSTA_NOTSTO_NOTSI_AA_CR0  
! clr SI, set AA  
ajmp RETsr  
!– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –  
! STATE  
!
: 90, Previously addressed with general call.  
DATA has been received, ACK has been returned.  
! ACTION : Read DATA.  
After General call only one byte will be received with ACK  
!
!
the second DATA will be received with NOT ACK.  
DATA will be received and NOT ACK returned.  
!– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –  
.sect  
srs90  
.base  
0x190  
0190  
0193  
0195  
75D018  
A6DA  
01DA  
mov psw,#SELRB3  
mov @r0,S1DAT  
ajmp LDAT  
! Read received DATA  
!– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –  
! STATE  
!
: 98, Previously addressed with general call.  
DATA has been received, NOT ACK has been returned.  
! ACTION : No save of DATA, Enter NOT addressed SLV mode.  
Recognition of own SLA. General call recognized, if S1ADR. 0–1.  
!– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –  
.sect  
srs98  
.base  
0x198  
0198  
75D8C5  
mov S1CON,#ENS1_NOTSTA_NOTSTO_NOTSI_AA_CR0  
! clr SI, set AA  
019B  
019D  
D0D0  
32  
pop psw  
reti  
61  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
!– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –  
! STATE  
!
: A0, A STOP condition or repeated START has been received,  
while still addressed as SLV/REC or SLV/TRX.  
! ACTION : No save of DATA, Enter NOT addressed SLV mode.  
Recognition of own SLA. General call recognized, if S1ADR. 0–1.  
!– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –  
!
.sect  
.base  
srsA0  
0x1a0  
01A0  
75D8C5  
mov S1CON,#ENS1_NOTSTA_NOTSTO_NOTSI_AA_CR0  
! clr SI, set AA  
01A3  
01A5  
D0D0  
32  
pop psw  
reti  
!********************************************************************************************************  
!********************************************************************************************************  
! SLAVE TRANSMITTER STATE SERVICE ROUTINES  
!********************************************************************************************************  
!********************************************************************************************************  
!– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –  
! STATE  
: A8, Own SLA+R received, ACK returned.  
! ACTION : DATA will be transmitted, A bit received.  
!– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –  
.sect  
stsa8  
.base  
0x1a8  
01A8  
01AB  
8548DA  
75D8C5  
mov S1DAT,STD  
mov S1CON,#ENS1_NOTSTA_NOTSTO_NOTSI_AA_CR0  
! load DATA in S1DAT  
! clr SI, set AA  
01AE  
01E8  
ajmp INITBASE2  
.sect  
.base  
ibase2  
0xe8  
00E8  
00EB  
00ED  
00EE  
00F0  
75D018  
7948  
09  
D0D0  
32  
INITBASE2:  
mov psw,#SELRB3  
mov r1, #STD  
inc  
r1  
pop psw  
reti  
!– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –  
! STATE : B0, Arbitration lost in SLA and R/W as MST. Own SLA+R received, ACK returned.  
! ACTION : DATA will be transmitted, A bit received.  
!
STA is set to restart MST mode after the bus is free again.  
!– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –  
.sect  
stsb0  
.base  
0x1b0  
01B0  
01B3  
01B6  
8548DA  
75D8E5  
01E8  
mov S1DAT,STD  
mov S1CON,#ENS1_STA_NOTSTO_NOTSI_AA_CR0  
ajmp INITBASE2  
! load DATA in S1DAT  
62  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
!– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –  
! STATE : B8, DATA has been transmitted, ACK received.  
! ACTION : DATA will be transmitted, ACK bit is received.  
!– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –  
.sect  
stsb8  
.base  
0x1b8  
01B8  
01BB  
01BD  
75D018  
87DA  
01F8  
mov psw,#SELRB3  
mov S1DAT,@r1  
ajmp SCON  
.sect  
scn  
.base  
0xf8  
00F8  
75D8C5  
SCON:  
mov S1CON,#ENS1_NOTSTA_NOTSTO_NOTSI_AA_CR0  
! clr SI, set AA  
00FB  
00FC  
00FE  
09  
D0D0  
32  
inc  
pop psw  
reti  
r1  
!– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –  
! STATE : C0, DATA has been transmitted, NOT ACK received.  
! ACTION : Enter not addressed SLV mode.  
!– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –  
.sect  
stsc0  
.base  
0x1c0  
01C0  
75D8C5  
mov S1CON,#ENS1_NOTSTA_NOTSTO_NOTSI_AA_CR0  
! clr SI, set AA  
01C3  
01C5  
D0D0  
32  
pop psw  
reti  
!– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –  
! STATE : C8, Last DATA has been transmitted (AA=0), ACK received.  
! ACTION : Enter not addressed SLV mode.  
!– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –  
.sect  
stsc8  
.base  
0x1c8  
01C8  
01CB  
75D8C5  
D0D0  
mov S1CON,#ENS1_NOTSTA_NOTSTO_NOTSI_AA_CR0  
! clr SI, set AA  
pop psw  
reti  
01CD 32  
!********************************************************************************************************  
!********************************************************************************************************  
! END OF SIO1 INTERRUPT ROUTINE  
!********************************************************************************************************  
!********************************************************************************************************  
Figure 30. Internal and External Data Memory Address Space with EXTRAM = 0  
63  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
The function of the IPH SFR, when combined with the IP SFR,  
determines the priority of each interrupt. The priority of each  
interrupt is determined as shown in the following table:  
Interrupt Priority Structure  
The P8xC660X2/661X2 has an 8/9 source four-level interrupt  
structure (see Table 15).  
There are 4 SFRs associated with the four-level interrupt. They are  
the IE, IEN1, IP, and IPH. (See Figures 31, 32, and 33.) The IPH  
(Interrupt Priority High) register makes the four-level interrupt  
structure possible. The IPH is located at SFR address B7H.  
Table 14.  
PRIORITY BITS  
INTERRUPT PRIORITY LEVEL  
IPH.x  
IP.x  
0
0
0
1
1
Level 0 (lowest priority)  
Level 1  
1
0
Level 2  
1
Level 3 (highest priority)  
Table 15. Interrupt Table P8xC661X2  
SOURCE  
POLLING PRIORITY  
REQUEST BITS  
HARDWARE CLEAR?  
VECTOR ADDRESS  
1
2
X0  
SIO1 (I2C)  
SIO2 (I2C)  
T0  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
IE0  
N (L) Y (T)  
03H  
2BH  
43H  
0BH  
13H  
1BH  
23H  
3BH  
33H  
N
N
TP0  
Y
X1  
IE1  
N (L) Y (T)  
T1  
TF1  
Y
N
N
N
SP  
RI, TI  
TF2, EXF2  
T2  
PCA  
CF, CCFn  
n = 0–4  
NOTES:  
1. L = Level activated  
2. T = Transition activated  
Table 16. Interrupt Table P8xC662X2  
SOURCE  
POLLING PRIORITY  
REQUEST BITS  
HARDWARE CLEAR?  
VECTOR ADDRESS  
1
2
X0  
SIO1 (I2C)  
T0  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
IE0  
N (L) Y (T)  
03H  
2BH  
0BH  
13H  
1BH  
23H  
3BH  
33H  
N
TP0  
Y
X1  
IE1  
N (L) Y (T)  
T1  
TF1  
Y
N
N
N
SP  
RI, TI  
TF2, EXF2  
T2  
PCA  
CF, CCFn  
n = 0–4  
NOTES:  
1. L = Level activated  
2. T = Transition activated  
The priority scheme for servicing the interrupts is the same as that  
for the 80C51, except there are four interrupt levels rather than two  
as on the 80C51. An interrupt will be serviced as long as an interrupt  
of equal or higher priority is not already being serviced. If an  
interrupt of equal or higher level priority is being serviced, the new  
interrupt will wait until it is finished before being serviced. If a lower  
priority level interrupt is being serviced, it will be stopped and the  
new interrupt serviced. When the new interrupt is finished, the lower  
priority level interrupt that was stopped will be completed.  
64  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
IE (0A8H)  
EA  
EC  
ET2  
ES  
ET1  
EX1  
ET0  
EX0  
Enable Bit = 1 enables the interrupt.  
Enable Bit = 0 disables it.  
BIT  
SYMBOL FUNCTION  
IE.7  
EA  
Global disable bit. If EA = 0, all interrupts are disabled. If EA = 1, each interrupt can be individually  
enabled or disabled by setting or clearing its enable bit.  
PCA interrupt enable bit  
Timer 2 interrupt enable bit.  
Serial Port interrupt enable bit.  
Timer 1 interrupt enable bit.  
External interrupt 1 enable bit.  
Timer 0 interrupt enable bit.  
IE.6  
IE.5  
IE.4  
IE.3  
IE.2  
IE.1  
IE.0  
EC  
ET2  
ES  
ET1  
EX1  
ET0  
EX0  
External interrupt 0 enable bit.  
SU01290  
Figure 31. IE Registers  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
IP (0B8H)  
PPC  
PT2  
PS  
PT1  
PX1  
PT0  
PX0  
Priority Bit = 1 assigns high priority  
Priority Bit = 0 assigns low priority  
BIT  
IP.7  
IP.6  
IP.5  
IP.4  
IP.3  
IP.2  
IP.1  
IP.0  
SYMBOL FUNCTION  
PPC  
PT2  
PS  
PT1  
PX1  
PT0  
PX0  
PCA interrupt priority bit  
Timer 2 interrupt priority bit.  
Serial Port interrupt priority bit.  
Timer 1 interrupt priority bit.  
External interrupt 1 priority bit.  
Timer 0 interrupt priority bit.  
External interrupt 0 priority bit.  
SU01291  
Figure 32. IP Registers  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
IPH (B7H)  
PPCH  
PT2H  
PSH  
PT1H  
PX1H  
PT0H  
PX0H  
Priority Bit = 1 assigns higher priority  
Priority Bit = 0 assigns lower priority  
BIT  
SYMBOL FUNCTION  
IPH.7  
IPH.6  
IPH.5  
IPH.4  
IPH.3  
IPH.2  
IPH.1  
IPH.0  
PPCH  
PT2H  
PSH  
PT1H  
PX1H  
PT0H  
PX0H  
PCA interrupt priority bit  
Timer 2 interrupt priority bit high.  
Serial Port interrupt priority bit high.  
Timer 1 interrupt priority bit high.  
External interrupt 1 priority bit high.  
Timer 0 interrupt priority bit high.  
External interrupt 0 priority bit high.  
SU01292  
Figure 33. IPH Registers  
65  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
The GF2 bit is a general purpose user-defined flag. Note that bit 2 is  
not writable and is always read as a zero. This allows the DPS bit to  
be quickly toggled simply by executing an INC AUXR1 instruction  
without affecting the GF2 bit.  
Reduced EMI Mode  
The AO bit (AUXR.0) in the AUXR register when set disables the  
ALE output unless the CPU needs to perform an off-chip memory  
access.  
Reduced EMI Mode  
AUXR (8EH)  
DPS  
BIT0  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
AUXR1  
DPTR1  
DPTR0  
SRD  
Fast/  
STD  
EXTRAM  
AO  
2
I C  
DPH  
(83H)  
DPL  
(82H)  
EXTERNAL  
DATA  
AUXR.0  
AO  
MEMORY  
See more detailed description in Figure 48.  
SU00745A  
Dual DPTR  
Figure 34.  
The dual DPTR structure (see Figure 34) is a way by which the chip  
will specify the address of an external data memory location. There  
are two 16-bit DPTR registers that address the external memory,  
and a single bit called DPS = AUXR1/bit0 that allows the program  
code to switch between them.  
DPTR Instructions  
The instructions that refer to DPTR refer to the data pointer that is  
currently selected using the AUXR1/bit 0 register. The six  
instructions that use the DPTR are as follows:  
New Register Name: AUXR1#  
SFR Address: A2H  
Reset Value: xxxxxxx0B  
INC DPTR  
Increments the data pointer by 1  
MOV DPTR, #data16 Loads the DPTR with a 16-bit constant  
AUXR1 (A2H)  
MOV A, @ A+DPTR  
MOVX A, @ DPTR  
Move code byte relative to DPTR to ACC  
7
6
5
4
3
2
0
1
0
Move external RAM (16-bit address) to  
ACC  
LPEP  
GPS  
DPS  
Where:  
MOVX @ DPTR , A  
JMP @ A + DPTR  
Move ACC to external RAM (16-bit  
address)  
DPS = AUXR1/bit0 = Switches between DPTR0 and DPTR1.  
Select Reg  
DPS  
Jump indirect relative to DPTR  
DPTR0  
DPTR1  
0
1
The data pointer can be accessed on a byte-by-byte basis by  
specifying the LOW or HIGH byte in an instruction which accesses  
the SFRs. See Application Note AN458 for more details.  
The DPS bit status should be saved by software when switching  
between DPTR0 and DPTR1.  
66  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
the PCA counter overflows and an interrupt will be generated if the  
ECF bit in the CMOD register is set, The CF bit can only be cleared  
by software. Bits 0 through 4 of the CCON register are the flags for  
the modules (bit 0 for module 0, bit 1 for module 1, etc.) and are set  
by hardware when either a match or a capture occurs. These flags  
also can only be cleared by software. The PCA interrupt system  
shown in Figure 37.  
Programmable Counter Array (PCA)  
The Programmable Counter Array available on the P8xC66xX2 is a  
special 16-bit Timer that has five 16-bit capture/compare modules  
associated with it. Each of the modules can be programmed to  
operate in one of four modes: rising and/or falling edge capture,  
software timer, high-speed output, or pulse width modulator. Each  
module has a pin associated with it in port 1. Module 0 is connected  
to P1.3 (CEX0), module 1 to P1.4 (CEX1), etc. The basic PCA  
configuration is shown in Figure 35.  
Each module in the PCA has a special function register associated  
with it. These registers are: CCAPM0 for module 0, CCAPM1 for  
module 1, etc. (see Figure 40). The registers contain the bits that  
control the mode that each module will operate in. The ECCF bit  
(CCAPMn.0 where n=0, 1, 2, 3, or 4 depending on the module)  
enables the CCF flag in the CCON SFR to generate an interrupt  
when a match or compare occurs in the associated module. PWM  
(CCAPMn.1) enables the pulse width modulation mode. The TOG  
bit (CCAPMn.2) when set causes the CEX output associated with  
the module to toggle when there is a match between the PCA  
counter and the module’s capture/compare register. The match bit  
MAT (CCAPMn.3) when set will cause the CCFn bit in the CCON  
register to be set when there is a match between the PCA counter  
and the module’s capture/compare register.  
The PCA timer is a common time base for all five modules and can  
be programmed to run at: 1/6 the oscillator frequency, 1/2 the  
oscillator frequency, the Timer 0 overflow, or the input on the ECI pin  
(P1.2). The timer count source is determined from the CPS1 and  
CPS0 bits in the CMOD SFR as follows (see Figure 38):  
CPS1 CPS0 PCA Timer Count Source  
0
0
1/6 oscillator frequency (6-clock mode);  
1/12 oscillator frequency (12-clock mode)  
1/2 oscillator frequency (6-clock mode);  
1/4 oscillator frequency (12-clock mode)  
Timer 0 overflow  
0
1
1
1
0
1
External Input at ECI pin  
The next two bits CAPN (CCAPMn.4) and CAPP (CCAPMn.5)  
determine the edge that a capture input will be active on. The CAPN  
bit enables the negative edge, and the CAPP bit enables the positive  
edge. If both bits are set both edges will be enabled and a capture will  
occur for either transition. The last bit in the register ECOM  
In the CMOD SFR are three additional bits associated with the PCA.  
They are CIDL which allows the PCA to stop during idle mode,  
WDTE which enables or disables the watchdog function on  
module 4, and ECF which when set causes an interrupt and the  
PCA overflow flag CF (in the CCON SFR) to be set when the PCA  
timer overflows. These functions are shown in Figure 36.  
(CCAPMn.6) when set enables the comparator function. Figure 41  
shows the CCAPMn settings for the various PCA functions.  
The watchdog timer function is implemented in module 4 (see  
Figure 45).  
There are two additional registers associated with each of the PCA  
modules. They are CCAPnH and CCAPnL and these are the  
registers that store the 16-bit count when a capture occurs or a  
compare should occur. When a module is used in the PWM mode  
these registers are used to control the duty cycle of the output.  
The CCON SFR contains the run control bit for the PCA and the  
flags for the PCA timer (CF) and each module (refer to Figure 39).  
To run the PCA the CR bit (CCON.6) must be set by software. The  
PCA is shut off by clearing this bit. The CF bit (CCON.7) is set when  
16 BITS  
P1.3/CEX0  
P1.4/CEX1  
P1.5/CEX2  
P1.6/CEX3  
MODULE 0  
MODULE 1  
MODULE 2  
MODULE 3  
MODULE 4  
16 BITS  
PCA TIMER/COUNTER  
TIME BASE FOR PCA MODULES  
MODULE FUNCTIONS:  
16-BIT CAPTURE  
16-BIT TIMER  
P1.7/CEX4  
SU00032  
16-BIT HIGH SPEED OUTPUT  
8-BIT PWM  
WATCHDOG TIMER (MODULE 4 ONLY)  
Figure 35. Programmable Counter Array (PCA)  
67  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
TO PCA  
MODULES  
OSC/6 (6 CLOCK MODE)  
OR  
OSC/12 (12 CLOCK MODE)  
OSC/2 (6 CLOCK MODE)  
OR  
OSC/4 (12 CLOCK MODE)  
OVERFLOW  
INTERRUPT  
CH  
CL  
16–BIT UP COUNTER  
TIMER 0 OVERFLOW  
EXTERNAL INPUT  
(P1.2/ECI)  
00  
01  
10  
11  
DECODE  
IDLE  
CMOD  
ECF  
CIDL  
CF  
WDTE  
––  
––  
––  
––  
CPS1  
CCF2  
CPS0  
(C1H)  
CCON  
CR  
CCF4  
CCF3  
CCF1  
CCF0  
(C0H)  
SU01256  
Figure 36. PCA Timer/Counter  
CCON  
(C0H)  
CF  
CR  
––  
CCF4  
CCF3  
CCF2  
CCF1  
CCF0  
PCA TIMER/COUNTER  
MODULE 0  
IE.7  
EA  
IE.6  
EC  
TO  
MODULE 1  
MODULE 2  
INTERRUPT  
PRIORITY  
DECODER  
MODULE 3  
MODULE 4  
CCAPMn.0  
ECCFn  
CMOD.0  
ECF  
SU01097  
Figure 37. PCA Interrupt System  
68  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
CMOD Address = D9H  
Reset Value = 00XX X000B  
CIDL  
WDTE  
CPS1  
CPS0  
ECF  
Bit:  
Function  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Symbol  
CIDL  
Counter Idle control: CIDL = 0 programs the PCA Counter to continue functioning during idle Mode. CIDL = 1 programs  
it to be gated off during idle.  
WDTE  
Watchdog Timer Enable: WDTE = 0 disables Watchdog Timer function on PCA Module 4. WDTE = 1 enables it.  
Not implemented, reserved for future use.*  
CPS1  
CPS0  
PCA Count Pulse Select bit 1.  
PCA Count Pulse Select bit 0.  
CPS1  
CPS0  
Selected PCA Input**  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
2
3
Internal clock, f  
/6 in 6-clock mode (f  
/2 in 6-clock mode (f  
/12 in 12-clock mode)  
/4 in 12-clock mode)  
OSC  
OSC  
OSC  
Internal clock, f  
OSC  
Timer 0 overflow  
External clock at ECI/P1.2 pin  
(max. rate = f /4 in 6-clock mode, f  
/8 in 12-clock mode)  
OCS  
OSC  
ECF  
PCA Enable Counter Overflow interrupt: ECF = 1 enables CF bit in CCON to generate an interrupt. ECF = 0 disables  
that function of CF.  
NOTE:  
*
User software should not write 1s to reserved bits. These bits may be used in future 8051 family products to invoke new features. In that case, the reset or inactive  
value of the new bit will be 0, and its active value will be 1. The value read from a reserved bit is indeterminate.  
**  
f
= oscillator frequency  
OSC  
SU01318  
Figure 38. CMOD: PCA Counter Mode Register  
CCON Address = D8H  
Bit Addressable  
CF  
Reset Value = 00X0 0000B  
CR  
CCF4  
CCF3  
CCF2  
CCF1  
CCF0  
Bit:  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Symbol  
CF  
Function  
PCA Counter Overflow flag. Set by hardware when the counter rolls over. CF flags an interrupt if bit ECF in CMOD is  
set. CF may be set by either hardware or software but can only be cleared by software.  
CR  
PCA Counter Run control bit. Set by software to turn the PCA counter on. Must be cleared by software to turn the PCA  
counter off.  
Not implemented, reserved for future use*.  
CCF4  
CCF3  
CCF2  
CCF1  
CCF0  
PCA Module 4 interrupt flag. Set by hardware when a match or capture occurs. Must be cleared by software.  
PCA Module 3 interrupt flag. Set by hardware when a match or capture occurs. Must be cleared by software.  
PCA Module 2 interrupt flag. Set by hardware when a match or capture occurs. Must be cleared by software.  
PCA Module 1 interrupt flag. Set by hardware when a match or capture occurs. Must be cleared by software.  
PCA Module 0 interrupt flag. Set by hardware when a match or capture occurs. Must be cleared by software.  
NOTE:  
*
User software should not write 1s to reserved bits. These bits may be used in future 8051 family products to invoke new features. In that case, the reset or inactive  
value of the new bit will be 0, and its active value will be 1. The value read from a reserved bit is indeterminate.  
SU01319  
Figure 39. CCON: PCA Counter Control Register  
69  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
CCAPMn Address  
CCAPM0  
CCAPM1  
CCAPM2  
CCAPM3  
CCAPM4  
0DAH  
0DBH  
0DCH  
0DDH  
0DEH  
Reset Value = X000 0000B  
Not Bit Addressable  
ECOMn CAPPn  
CAPNn  
MATn  
TOGn  
PWMn  
ECCFn  
Bit:  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Symbol  
Function  
Not implemented, reserved for future use*.  
ECOMn  
CAPPn  
CAPNn  
MATn  
Enable Comparator. ECOMn = 1 enables the comparator function.  
Capture Positive, CAPPn = 1 enables positive edge capture.  
Capture Negative, CAPNn = 1 enables negative edge capture.  
Match. When MATn = 1, a match of the PCA counter with this module’s compare/capture register causes the CCFn bit  
in CCON to be set, flagging an interrupt.  
TOGn  
Toggle. When TOGn = 1, a match of the PCA counter with this module’s compare/capture register causes the CEXn  
pin to toggle.  
PWMn  
ECCFn  
Pulse Width Modulation Mode. PWMn = 1 enables the CEXn pin to be used as a pulse width modulated output.  
Enable CCF interrupt. Enables compare/capture flag CCFn in the CCON register to generate an interrupt.  
NOTE:  
*User software should not write 1s to reserved bits. These bits may be used in future 8051 family products to invoke new features In that case, the reset or inactive  
value of the new bit will be 0, and its active value will be 1. The value read from a reserved bit is indeterminate.  
SU01320  
Figure 40. CCAPMn: PCA Modules Compare/Capture Registers  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
ECOMn CAPPn CAPNn  
MATn  
TOGn  
PWMn  
ECCFn  
MODULE FUNCTION  
0
X
X
X
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
X
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
X
X
X
X
X
0
No operation  
16-bit capture by a positive-edge trigger on CEXn  
16-bit capture by a negative trigger on CEXn  
16-bit capture by a transition on CEXn  
16-bit Software Timer  
16-bit High Speed Output  
8-bit PWM  
X
Watchdog Timer  
Figure 41. PCA Module Modes (CCAPMn Register)  
PCA Capture Mode  
counter and the module’s capture registers. To activate this mode  
the TOG, MAT, and ECOM bits in the module’s CCAPMn SFR must  
be set (see Figure 44).  
To use one of the PCA modules in the capture mode either one or  
both of the CCAPM bits CAPN and CAPP for that module must be  
set. The external CEX input for the module (on port 1) is sampled for  
a transition. When a valid transition occurs the PCA hardware loads  
the value of the PCA counter registers (CH and CL) into the  
module’s capture registers (CCAPnL and CCAPnH). If the CCFn bit  
for the module in the CCON SFR and the ECCFn bit in the CCAPMn  
SFR are set then an interrupt will be generated. Refer to Figure 42.  
Pulse Width Modulator Mode  
All of the PCA modules can be used as PWM outputs. Figure 45  
shows the PWM function. The frequency of the output depends on  
the source for the PCA timer. All of the modules will have the same  
frequency of output because they all share the PCA timer. The duty  
cycle of each module is independently variable using the module’s  
capture register CCAPLn. When the value of the PCA CL SFR is  
less than the value in the module’s CCAPLn SFR the output will be  
LOW, when it is equal to or greater than the output will be HIGH.  
When CL overflows from FF to 00, CCAPLn is reloaded with the  
value in CCAPHn. the allows updating the PWM without glitches.  
The PWM and ECOM bits in the module’s CCAPMn register must  
be set to enable the PWM mode.  
16-bit Software Timer Mode  
The PCA modules can be used as software timers by setting both  
the ECOM and MAT bits in the modules CCAPMn register. The PCA  
timer will be compared to the module’s capture registers and when a  
match occurs an interrupt will occur if the CCFn (CCON SFR) and  
the ECCFn (CCAPMn SFR) bits for the module are both set (see  
Figure 43).  
High Speed Output Mode  
In this mode the CEX output (on port 1) associated with the PCA  
module will toggle each time a match occurs between the PCA  
70  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
CCON  
(D8H)  
CF  
CR  
––  
CCF4  
CCF3  
CCF2  
CCF1  
CCF0  
PCA INTERRUPT  
PCA TIMER/COUNTER  
(TO CCFn)  
CH  
CL  
CAPTURE  
CEXn  
CCAPnH  
CCAPnL  
CCAPMn, n= 0 to 4  
(DAH – DEH)  
––  
ECOMn  
0
CAPPn  
CAPNn  
MATn  
0
TOGn  
0
PWMn  
ECCFn  
0
SU01608  
Figure 42. PCA Capture Mode  
CCON  
(D8H)  
CF  
CR  
––  
CCF4  
CCF3  
CCF2  
CCF1  
CCF0  
WRITE TO  
CCAPnH  
RESET  
PCA INTERRUPT  
CCAPnH  
CCAPnL  
WRITE TO  
CCAPnL  
(TO CCFn)  
0
1
ENABLE  
MATCH  
16–BIT COMPARATOR  
CH  
CL  
PCA TIMER/COUNTER  
CCAPMn, n= 0 to 4  
(DAH – DEH)  
––  
ECOMn  
CAPPn  
0
CAPNn  
0
MATn  
TOGn  
0
PWMn  
0
ECCFn  
SU01609  
Figure 43. PCA Compare Mode  
71  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
CCON  
CF  
CR  
––  
CCF4  
CCF3  
CCF2  
CCF1  
CCF0  
(D8H)  
WRITE TO  
CCAPnH  
RESET  
PCA INTERRUPT  
CCAPnH  
CCAPnL  
WRITE TO  
CCAPnL  
(TO CCFn)  
0
1
MATCH  
ENABLE  
16–BIT COMPARATOR  
TOGGLE  
CEXn  
CH  
CL  
PCA TIMER/COUNTER  
CCAPMn, n: 0..4  
ECCFn  
––  
ECOMn  
CAPPn  
0
CAPNn  
0
MATn  
TOGn  
PWMn  
0
(DAH – DEH)  
1
SU01610  
Figure 44. PCA High Speed Output Mode  
CCAPnH  
CCAPnL  
0
CL < CCAPnL  
ENABLE  
8–BIT  
CEXn  
COMPARATOR  
CL >= CCAPnL  
1
CL  
OVERFLOW  
PCA TIMER/COUNTER  
CCAPMn, n: 0..4  
(DAH – DEH)  
––  
ECOMn  
CAPPn  
0
CAPNn  
MATn  
0
TOGn  
0
PWMn  
ECCFn  
0
0
SU01611  
Figure 45. PCA PWM Mode  
72  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
CMOD  
(D9H)  
CIDL  
WDTE  
––  
––  
MODULE 4  
MATCH  
––  
CPS1  
CPS0  
ECF  
WRITE TO  
CCAP4L  
RESET  
CCAP4H  
CCAP4L  
WRITE TO  
CCAP4H  
1
0
ENABLE  
16–BIT COMPARATOR  
RESET  
CH  
CL  
PCA TIMER/COUNTER  
CCAPM4  
(DEH)  
––  
ECOMn  
CAPPn  
0
CAPNn  
0
MATn  
1
TOGn  
X
PWMn  
0
ECCFn  
X
SU01612  
Figure 46. PCA Watchdog Timer mode (Module 4 only)  
PCA Watchdog Timer  
The first two options are more reliable because the watchdog  
timer is never disabled as in option #3. If the program counter ever  
goes astray, a match will eventually occur and cause an internal  
reset. The second option is also not recommended if other PCA  
modules are being used. Remember, the PCA timer is the time  
base for all modules; changing the time base for other modules  
would not be a good idea. Thus, in most applications the first  
solution is the best option.  
An on-board watchdog timer is available with the PCA to improve the  
reliability of the system without increasing chip count. Watchdog  
timers are useful for systems that are susceptible to noise, power  
glitches, or electrostatic discharge. Module 4 is the only PCA module  
that can be programmed as a watchdog. However, this module can  
still be used for other modes if the watchdog is not needed.  
Figure 46 shows a diagram of how the watchdog works. The user  
pre-loads a 16-bit value in the compare registers. Just like the other  
compare modes, this 16-bit value is compared to the PCA timer  
value. If a match is allowed to occur, an internal reset will be  
generated. This will not cause the RST pin to be driven HIGH.  
Figure 47 shows the code for initializing the watchdog timer.  
Module 4 can be configured in either compare mode, and the WDTE  
bit in CMOD must also be set. The user’s software then must  
periodically change (CCAP4H,CCAP4L) to keep a match from  
occurring with the PCA timer (CH,CL). This code is given in the  
WATCHDOG routine in Figure 47.  
In order to hold off the reset, the user has three options:  
1. periodically change the compare value so it will never match the  
PCA timer,  
This routine should not be part of an interrupt service routine,  
because if the program counter goes astray and gets stuck in an  
infinite loop, interrupts will still be serviced and the watchdog will  
keep getting reset. Thus, the purpose of the watchdog would be  
2. periodically change the PCA timer value so it will never match  
the compare values, or  
3. disable the watchdog by clearing the WDTE bit before a match  
occurs and then re-enable it.  
defeated. Instead, call this subroutine from the main program within  
16  
2
count of the PCA timer.  
73  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
INIT_WATCHDOG:  
MOV CCAPM4, #4CH  
MOV CCAP4L, #0FFH  
MOV CCAP4H, #0FFH  
; Module 4 in compare mode  
; Write to LOW byte first  
; Before PCA timer counts up to  
; FFFF Hex, these compare values  
; must be changed  
ORL CMOD, #40H  
; Set the WDTE bit to enable the  
; watchdog timer without changing  
; the other bits in CMOD  
;
;********************************************************************  
;
; Main program goes here, but CALL WATCHDOG periodically.  
;
;********************************************************************  
;
WATCHDOG:  
CLR EA  
; Hold off interrupts  
MOV CCAP4L, #00  
MOV CCAP4H, CH  
SETB EA  
; Next compare value is within  
; 255 counts of the current PCA  
; timer value  
RET  
Figure 47. PCA Watchdog Timer Initialization Code  
74  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
For example:  
MOV @R0,acc  
Expanded Data RAM Addressing  
The P8xC660X2/661X2 has internal data memory that is mapped  
into four separate segments: the lower 128 bytes of RAM, upper 128  
bytes of RAM, 128 bytes Special Function Register (SFR), and  
256 bytes expanded RAM (ERAM) (768 bytes for the RD2).  
where R0 contains 0A0H, accesses the data byte at address 0A0H,  
rather than P2 (whose address is 0A0H).  
The ERAM can be accessed by indirect addressing, with EXTRAM  
bit cleared and MOVX instructions. This part of memory is physically  
located on-chip, logically occupies the first 256/768 bytes of external  
data memory in the P8xC660X2/661X2.  
The four segments are:  
1. The Lower 128 bytes of RAM (addresses 00H to 7FH) are  
directly and indirectly addressable.  
2. The Upper 128 bytes of RAM (addresses 80H to FFH) are  
indirectly addressable only.  
With EXTRAM = 0, the ERAM is indirectly addressed, using the  
MOVX instruction in combination with any of the registers R0, R1 of  
the selected bank or DPTR. An access to ERAM will not affect ports  
P0, P3.6 (WR#) and P3.7 (RD#). P2 SFR is output during external  
addressing. For example, with EXTRAM = 0,  
3. The Special Function Registers, SFRs, (addresses 80H to FFH)  
are directly addressable only.  
4. The 256/768-bytes expanded RAM (ERAM, 00H – 1FFH/2FFH)  
are indirectly accessed by move external instruction, MOVX, and  
with the EXTRAM bit cleared, see Figure 48.  
MOVX @R0,acc  
where R0 contains 0A0H, accesses the ERAM at address 0A0H  
rather than external memory. An access to external data memory  
locations higher than the ERAM will be performed with the MOVX  
DPTR instructions in the same way as in the standard 80C51, so  
with P0 and P2 as data/address bus, and P3.6 and P3.7 as write  
and read timing signals. Refer to Figure 49.  
The Lower 128 bytes can be accessed by either direct or indirect  
addressing. The Upper 128 bytes can be accessed by indirect  
addressing only. The Upper 128 bytes occupy the same address  
space as the SFR. That means they have the same address, but are  
physically separate from SFR space.  
With EXTRAM = 1, MOVX @Ri and MOVX @DPTR will be similar  
to the standard 80C51. MOVX @ Ri will provide an 8-bit address  
multiplexed with data on Port 0 and any output port pins can be  
used to output higher order address bits. This is to provide the  
external paging capability. MOVX @DPTR will generate a 16-bit  
address. Port 2 outputs the high-order eight address bits (the  
contents of DPH) while Port 0 multiplexes the low-order eight  
address bits (DPL) with data. MOVX @Ri and MOVX @DPTR will  
generate either read or write signals on P3.6 (WR) and P3.7 (RD).  
When an instruction accesses an internal location above address  
7FH, the CPU knows whether the access is to the upper 128 bytes  
of data RAM or to SFR space by the addressing mode used in the  
instruction. Instructions that use direct addressing access SFR  
space. For example:  
MOV 0A0H,#data  
accesses the SFR at location 0A0H (which is P2). Instructions that  
use indirect addressing access the Upper 128 bytes of data RAM.  
The stack pointer (SP) may be located anywhere in the 256 bytes  
RAM (lower and upper RAM) internal data memory. The stack may  
not be located in the ERAM.  
75  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
AUXR  
Address = 8EH  
Reset Value = xx0x 0x00B  
Not Bit Addressable  
6
SRD  
4
FME  
2
EXTRAM  
AO  
Bit:  
Function  
Disable/Enable ALE  
7
5
3
1
0
Symbol  
AO  
AO  
0
Operating Mode  
ALE is emitted at a constant rate of / the oscillator frequency (12-clock mode; / f  
3 OSC  
1
1
6
in 6-clock mode).  
ALE is active only during off-chip memory access.  
1
EXTRAM  
FME  
Internal/External RAM access using MOVX @Ri/@DPTR  
EXTRAM  
Operating Mode  
0
1
Internal ERAM access using MOVX @Ri/@DPTR.  
External data memory access.  
2
Fast Mode Enable, switches between the Standard and the Fast data-transfer mode for the SIO1 I C serial port (a  
one-time set bit, cleared by chip-reset only)  
FME  
Operating Mode  
0
1
100 Kbit/s Standard mode selected.  
400 kbit/s Fast mode selected.  
SRD  
Slew-Rate control-circuit Disable, switches between the minimum and the maximum slew-rate of the SCL1 and SDA1 pins  
of the SIO2 I C serial port.  
2
SRD  
Operating Mode  
0
1
Minimum output slew-rate.  
Maximum output slew-rate.  
Not implemented, reserved for future use*.  
NOTE:  
*User software should not write 1s to reserved bits. These bits may be used in future 8051 family products to invoke new features. In that case, the reset or inactive value  
of the new bit will be 0, and its active value will be 1. The value read from a reserved bit is indeterminate.  
SU01749  
Figure 48. AUXR: Auxiliary Register  
FF  
FF  
3FFF  
UPPER  
128 BYTES  
INTERNAL RAM  
SPECIAL  
FUNCTION  
REGISTER  
EXTERNAL  
DATA  
MEMORY  
80  
80  
ERAM  
256 BYTES  
LOWER  
128 BYTES  
INTERNAL RAM  
100  
00  
00  
0000  
SU01750  
Figure 49. Internal and External Data Memory Address Space with EXTRAM = 0  
76  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
HARDWARE WATCHDOG TIMER (ONE-TIME  
Using the WDT  
To enable the WDT, the user must write 01EH and 0E1H in sequence  
to the WDTRST, SFR location 0A6H. When the WDT is enabled, the  
user needs to service it by writing 01EH and 0E1H to WDTRST to  
avoid a WDT overflow. The 14-bit counter overflows when it reaches  
16383 (3FFFH) and this will reset the device. When the WDT is  
enabled, it will increment every machine cycle while the oscillator is  
running. This means the user must reset the WDT at least every  
16383 machine cycles. To reset the WDT, the user must write 01EH  
and 0E1H to WDTRST. WDTRST is a write only register. The WDT  
counter cannot be read or written. When the WDT overflows, it will  
generate an output RESET pulse at the reset pin (see note below).  
ENABLED WITH RESET-OUT FOR P8XC66xX2)  
The WDT is intended as a recovery method in situations where the  
CPU may be subjected to software upset. The WDT consists of a  
14-bit counter and the WatchDog Timer reset (WDTRST) SFR. The  
WDT is disabled at reset. To enable the WDT, the user must write  
01EH and 0E1H in sequence to the WDTRST, SFR location 0A6H.  
When the WDT is enabled, it will increment every machine cycle  
while the oscillator is running and there is no way to disable the  
WDT except through reset (either hardware reset or WDT overflow  
reset). When the WDT overflows, it will drive an output reset HIGH  
pulse at the RST-pin (see the note below).  
The RESET pulse duration is 98 × T  
(6-clock mode; 196 in  
OSC  
12-clock mode), where T  
= 1/f . To make the best use of the  
OSC  
OSC  
WDT, it should be serviced in those sections of code that will  
periodically be executed within the time required to prevent a WDT  
reset.  
77  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
1, 2, 3  
ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS  
PARAMETER  
Operating temperature under bias  
RATING  
0 to +70 or –40 to +85  
–65 to +150  
0 to +13.0  
–0.5 to +6.0  
15  
UNIT  
°C  
°C  
V
Storage temperature range  
Voltage on EA/V pin to V  
PP  
SS  
4
Voltage on any other pin to V  
V
SS  
Maximum I per I/O pin  
mA  
W
OL  
Power dissipation (based on package heat transfer limitations, not device power consumption)  
NOTES:  
1.5  
1. Stresses above those listed under Absolute Maximum Ratings may cause permanent damage to the device. This is a stress rating only and  
functional operation of the device at these or any conditions other than those described in the AC and DC Electrical Characteristics section  
of this specification is not implied.  
2. This product includes circuitry specifically designed for the protection of its internal devices from the damaging effects of excessive static  
charge. Nonetheless, it is suggested that conventional precautions be taken to avoid applying greater than the rated maximum.  
3. Parameters are valid over operating temperature range unless otherwise specified. All voltages are with respect to V unless otherwise  
SS  
noted.  
4. Transient voltage only.  
AC ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS  
T
amb  
= 0°C to +70°C or –40°C to +85°C  
CLOCK FREQUENCY  
RANGE  
SYMBOL  
FIGURE  
PARAMETER  
OPERATING MODE  
POWER SUPPLY  
VOLTAGE  
MIN  
MAX  
UNIT  
1/t  
CLCL  
55  
Oscillator frequency  
6-clock  
6-clock  
12-clock  
12-clock  
5 V " 10%  
2.7 V to 5.5 V  
5 V " 10%  
2.7 V to 5.5 V  
0
0
0
0
30  
16  
33  
16  
MHz  
MHz  
MHz  
MHz  
78  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
DC ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS  
T
amb  
= 0 °C to +70 °C or –40 °C to +85 °C; V = 2.7 V to 5.5 V; V = 0 V (16 MHz max. CPU clock)  
CC  
SS  
SYMBOL PARAMETER  
TEST  
CONDITIONS  
LIMITS  
UNIT  
1
MIN  
TYP  
MAX  
0.2 V –0.1  
11  
V
Input LOW voltage (except EA, SCL, SDA) 4.0 V < V < 5.5 V  
–0.5  
–0.5  
–0.5  
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
IL  
CC  
CC  
2.7 V < V < 4.0 V  
0.7 V  
CC  
CC  
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
LOW level input voltage EA  
0.2 V –0.35  
DD  
IL1  
Input HIGH voltage (ports 0, 1, 2, 3, EA)  
0.2 V +0.9  
V
V
+0.5  
+0.5  
IH  
CC  
CC  
CC  
11  
Input HIGH voltage, XTAL1, RST  
0.7 V  
0.7 V  
IH1  
IH2  
OL  
OL1  
OH  
CC  
DD  
13  
Input HIGH voltage, SDL and SDA  
5.5  
0.4  
0.4  
8
2
2
Output LOW voltage, ports 1, 2  
V
CC  
V
CC  
V
CC  
V
CC  
V
CC  
= 2.7 V; I = 1.6 mA  
OL  
7,8  
Output LOW voltage, port 0, ALE, PSEN  
= 2.7 V; I = 3.2 mA  
OL  
3
Output HIGH voltage, ports 1, 2, 3  
= 2.7 V; I = –20 mA  
V
CC  
V
CC  
V
CC  
– 0.7  
– 0.7  
– 0.7  
OH  
= 4.5 V; I = –30 mA  
OH  
V
V
Output HIGH voltage (port 0 in external bus  
= 2.7 V; I = –3.2 mA  
OH1  
OH  
9
3
mode), ALE , PSEN  
14  
Hysteresis of Schmitt Trigger inputs SCL and  
SDA (Fast Mode)  
0.5V  
V
HYS  
DD  
I
I
I
I
Logical 0 input current, ports 1, 2, 3  
V
V
= 0.4 V  
–1  
–50  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
IL  
IN  
6
Logical 1-to-0 transition current, ports 1, 2, 3  
= 2.0 V; See note 4  
–650  
±10  
TL  
LI  
IN  
Input leakage current, port 0  
0.45 < V < V – 0.3  
IN  
CC  
Input leakage current SCL and SDA  
0 V < V < 5.5 V  
±10  
LI2  
IN  
0 V < V < 5.5 V  
DD  
I
Power supply current (see Figure 58 and  
Source Code):  
CC  
Active mode @ 16 MHz  
mA  
mA  
mA  
Idle mode @ 16 MHz  
Power-down mode or clock stopped  
(see Figure 54 for conditions)  
T
= 0 °C to 70 °C  
2
3
30  
50  
amb  
12  
T
amb  
= –40 °C to +85 °C  
mA  
V
RAM keep-alive voltage  
1.2  
40  
V
RAM  
R
C
Internal reset pull-down resistor  
225  
15  
kΩ  
pF  
RST  
IO  
10  
Pin capacitance (except EA)  
NOTES:  
1. Typical ratings are not guaranteed. Values listed are based on tests conducted on limited number of samples at room temperature.  
2. Capacitive loading on ports 0 and 2 may cause spurious noise to be superimposed on the V s of ALE and ports 1 and 3. The noise is  
OL  
due to external bus capacitance discharging into the port 0 and port 2 pins when these pins make 1-to-0 transitions during bus operations.  
In the worst cases (capacitive loading > 100 pF), the noise pulse on the ALE pin may exceed 0.8 V. In such cases, it may be desirable to  
qualify ALE with a Schmitt Trigger, or use an address latch with a Schmitt Trigger STROBE input. I can exceed these conditions provided  
OL  
that no single output sinks more than 5 mA and no more than two outputs exceed the test conditions.  
3. Capacitive loading on ports 0 and 2 may cause the V on ALE and PSEN to momentarily fall below the V –0.7 specification when the  
OH  
CC  
address bits are stabilizing.  
4. Pins of ports 1, 2 and 3 source a transition current when they are being externally driven from 1 to 0. The transition current reaches its  
maximum value when V is approximately 2 V.  
IN  
5. See Figures 60 through 63 for I test conditions and Figure 58 for I vs. Frequency  
CC  
CC  
12-clock mode characteristics:  
Active mode (operating):  
Active mode (reset):  
Idle mode:  
I
I
I
= 1.0 mA + 1.1 mA × FREQ.[MHz]  
CC  
CC  
CC  
= 7.0 mA + 1.1 mA   FREQ.[MHz]  
= 1.0 mA + 0.44 mA   FREQ.[MHz]  
= –40 °C to +85 °C, I = –750 mA.  
amb TL  
6. This value applies to T  
= 0 °C to +70 °C. For T  
amb  
7. Load capacitance for port 0, ALE, and PSEN = 100 pF, load capacitance for all other outputs = 80 pF.  
8. Under steady state (non-transient) conditions, I must be externally limited as follows:  
OL  
Maximum I per port pin:  
15 mA (*NOTE: This is 85 °C specification.)  
OL  
Maximum I per 8-bit port:  
26 mA  
71 mA  
OL  
Maximum total I for all outputs:  
OL  
If I exceeds the test condition, V may exceed the related specification. Pins are not guaranteed to sink current greater than the listed  
OL  
OL  
test conditions.  
9. ALE is tested to V  
, except when ALE is off then V is the voltage specification.  
OH1  
OH  
79  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
10.Pin capacitance is characterized but not tested. Pin capacitance is less than 25 pF. Pin capacitance of ceramic package is less than 15 pF  
(except EA is 25 pF).  
11. To improve noise rejection a nominal 100 ns glitch rejection circuitry has been added to the RST pin, and a nominal 15 ns glitch rejection  
circuitry has been added to the INT0 and INT1 pins. Previous devices provided only an inherent 5 ns of glitch rejection.  
12.Power down mode for 3 V range: Commercial Temperature Range – typ: 0.5 mA, max. 20 mA; Industrial Temperature Range – typ. 1.0 mA,  
max. 30 mA;  
2
13.The input threshold voltage of SCL and SDA (SIO1) meets the I C specification, so an input voltage below 0.3 V will be recognized as a  
DD  
logic 0 while an input voltage above 0.7 V will be recognized as a logic 1.  
DD  
14.Not 100% tested.  
80  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
DC ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS  
T
amb  
= 0 °C to +70 °C or –40 °C to +85 °C; V = 5 V ±10%; V = 0 V (30/33 MHz max. CPU clock)  
CC  
SS  
SYMBOL PARAMETER  
TEST  
CONDITIONS  
LIMITS  
MIN  
UNIT  
1
TYP  
MAX  
0.2 V –0.1  
11  
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
Input LOW voltage (except EA, SCL, SDA) 4.5 V < V < 5.5 V  
–0.5  
–0.5  
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
IL  
CC  
CC  
LOW level input voltage EA  
0.2 V –0.35  
DD  
IL1  
IH  
Input HIGH voltage (ports 0, 1, 2, 3, EA)  
0.2 V +0.9  
V
CC  
V
CC  
+0.5  
+0.5  
CC  
11  
Input HIGH voltage, XTAL1, RST  
0.7 V  
0.7 V  
IH1  
IH2  
OL  
OL1  
OH  
OH1  
CC  
DD  
12  
Input HIGH voltage, SDL and SDA  
5.5  
0.4  
0.4  
8
2
2
Output LOW voltage, ports 1, 2, 3  
V
CC  
V
CC  
V
CC  
V
CC  
= 4.5 V; I = 1.6 mA  
OL  
7, 8  
Output LOW voltage, port 0, ALE, PSEN  
= 4.5 V; I = 3.2 mA  
OL  
3
Output HIGH voltage, ports 1, 2, 3  
= 4.5 V; I = –30 mA  
V
V
– 0.7  
– 0.7  
OH  
CC  
Output HIGH voltage (port 0 in external bus  
= 4.5 V; I = –3.2 mA  
OH  
CC  
9
3
mode), ALE , PSEN  
V
HYS  
Hysteresis of Schmitt Trigger inputs SCL and  
SDA (Fast Mode)  
0.5V  
V
DD  
13  
I
I
I
I
Logical 0 input current, ports 1, 2, 3  
V
V
= 0.4 V  
–1  
–50  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
IL  
IN  
6
Logical 1-to-0 transition current, ports 1, 2, 3  
= 2.0 V; See note 4  
–650  
±10  
TL  
LI  
IN  
Input leakage current, port 0  
0.45 < V < V – 0.3  
IN  
CC  
Input leakage current SCL and SDA  
0 V < V < 5.5 V  
±10  
LI2  
IN  
0 V < V < 5.5 V  
DD  
I
Power supply current  
CC  
Active mode (see Note 5)  
Idle mode (see Note 5)  
Power-down mode or clock stopped  
(see Figure 63 for conditions)  
T
= 0 °C to 70 °C  
2
3
30  
50  
mA  
mA  
amb  
T
amb  
= –40 °C to +85 °C  
V
RAM keep-alive voltage  
1.2  
40  
V
RAM  
R
C
Internal reset pull-down resistor  
225  
15  
kΩ  
pF  
RST  
IO  
10  
Pin capacitance (except EA)  
NOTES:  
1. Typical ratings are not guaranteed. The values listed are at room temperature, 5 V.  
2. Capacitive loading on ports 0 and 2 may cause spurious noise to be superimposed on the V s of ALE and ports 1 and 3. The noise is due  
OL  
to external bus capacitance discharging into the port 0 and port 2 pins when these pins make 1-to-0 transitions during bus operations. In the  
worst cases (capacitive loading > 100 pF), the noise pulse on the ALE pin may exceed 0.8 V. In such cases, it may be desirable to qualify  
ALE with a Schmitt Trigger, or use an address latch with a Schmitt Trigger STROBE input. I can exceed these conditions provided that no  
OL  
single output sinks more than 5 mA and no more than two outputs exceed the test conditions.  
3. Capacitive loading on ports 0 and 2 may cause the V on ALE and PSEN to momentarily fall below the V –0.7 specification when the  
OH  
CC  
address bits are stabilizing.  
4. Pins of ports 1, 2 and 3 source a transition current when they are being externally driven from 1 to 0. The transition current reaches its  
maximum value when V is approximately 2 V.  
IN  
5. See Figures 60 through 63 for I test conditions and Figure 58 for I vs. Frequency.  
CC  
CC  
12-clock mode characteristics:  
Active mode (operating):  
Active mode (reset):  
Idle mode:  
I
I
I
= 1.0 mA + 1.1 mA × FREQ.[MHz]  
CC  
CC  
CC  
= 7.0 mA + 1.1 mA   FREQ.[MHz]  
= 1.0 mA + 0.44 mA   FREQ.[MHz]  
= –40°C to +85°C, I = –750 µΑ.  
amb TL  
6. This value applies to T  
= 0°C to +70°C. For T  
amb  
7. Load capacitance for port 0, ALE, and PSEN = 100 pF, load capacitance for all other outputs = 80 pF.  
8. Under steady state (non-transient) conditions, I must be externally limited as follows:  
OL  
Maximum I per port pin:  
15 mA (*NOTE: This is 85 °C specification.)  
OL  
Maximum I per 8-bit port:  
26 mA  
71 mA  
OL  
Maximum total I for all outputs:  
OL  
If I exceeds the test condition, V may exceed the related specification. Pins are not guaranteed to sink current greater than the listed  
OL  
OL  
test conditions.  
9. ALE is tested to V  
, except when ALE is off then V is the voltage specification.  
OH  
OH1  
10.Pin capacitance is characterized but not tested. Pin capacitance is less than 25 pF. Pin capacitance of ceramic package is less than 15 pF  
(except EA is 25 pF).  
11. To improve noise rejection a nominal 100 ns glitch rejection circuitry has been added to the RST pin, and a nominal 15 ns glitch rejection  
circuitry has been added to the INT0 and INT1 pins. Previous devices provided only an inherent 5 ns of glitch rejection.  
81  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
2
12.The input threshold voltage of SCL and SDA (SIO1) meets the I C specification, so an input voltage below 0.3 V will be recognized as a  
DD  
logic 0 while an input voltage above 0.7 V will be recognized as a logic 1.  
DD  
13.Not 100% tested.  
82  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
AC ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS (12-CLOCK MODE, 5 V ±10% OPERATION)  
1,2,3,4  
T
amb  
= 0 °C to +70 °C or –40 °C to +85 °C ; V = 5 V ±10%, V = 0 V  
CC SS  
Symbol  
Figure  
Parameter  
Unit  
Limits  
MIN  
16 MHz Clock  
MAX  
MIN  
MAX  
1/t  
55  
50  
50  
50  
50  
50  
50  
50  
50  
50  
50  
50  
Oscillator frequency  
ALE pulse width  
0
33  
MHz  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
CLCL  
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
2 t  
–8  
117  
LHLL  
CLCL  
Address valid to ALE LOW  
Address hold after ALE LOW  
ALE LOW to valid instruction in  
ALE LOW to PSEN LOW  
t
t
–13  
–20  
49.5  
42.5  
AVLL  
LLAX  
LLIV  
CLCL  
CLCL  
4 t  
CLCL  
3 t  
CLCL  
CLCL  
–35  
–35  
215  
t
–10  
52.5  
LLPL  
PLPH  
PLIV  
PXIX  
PXIZ  
AVIV  
PLAZ  
CLCL  
PSEN pulse width  
3 t  
–10  
177.5  
CLCL  
PSEN LOW to valid instruction in  
Input instruction hold after PSEN  
Input instruction float after PSEN  
Address to valid instruction in  
PSEN LOW to address float  
152.5  
0
0
t
–10  
52.5  
277.5  
10  
CLCL  
5 t  
10  
–35  
Data Memory  
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
51  
RD pulse width  
6 t  
6 t  
–20  
–20  
355  
355  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
RLRH  
WLWH  
RLDV  
RHDX  
RHDZ  
LLDV  
CLCL  
52  
WR pulse width  
CLCL  
51  
RD LOW to valid data in  
Data hold after RD  
5 t  
–35  
277.5  
CLCL  
51  
0
0
51  
Data float after RD  
2 t  
CLCL  
8 t  
CLCL  
9 t  
CLCL  
3 t  
CLCL  
–10  
–35  
–35  
+15  
115  
51  
ALE LOW to valid data in  
Address to valid data in  
ALE LOW to RD or WR LOW  
465  
51  
527.5  
202.5  
AVDV  
LLWL  
51, 52  
51, 52  
52  
3 t  
4 t  
–15  
–15  
172.5  
235  
CLCL  
Address valid to WR LOW or RD LOW  
Data valid to WR transition  
Data hold after WR  
AVWL  
QVWX  
WHQX  
QVWH  
RLAZ  
WHLH  
CLCL  
t
t
–25  
37.5  
47.5  
432.5  
CLCL  
CLCL  
52  
–15  
–5  
52  
Data valid to WR HIGH  
7 t  
CLCL  
51  
RD LOW to address float  
RD or WR HIGH to ALE HIGH  
0
0
51, 52  
t
–10  
t
+10  
52.5  
72.5  
CLCL  
CLCL  
External Clock  
t
t
t
t
55  
55  
55  
55  
High time  
Low time  
Rise time  
Fall time  
0.32 t  
0.32 t  
t
t
– t  
– t  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
CHCX  
CLCX  
CLCH  
CHCL  
CLCL  
CLCL  
CLCL  
CLCX  
CHCX  
CLCL  
5
5
Shift register  
t
t
t
t
t
54  
54  
54  
54  
54  
Serial port clock cycle time  
12 t  
10 t  
750  
600  
110  
0
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
XLXL  
CLCL  
Output data setup to clock rising edge  
Output data hold after clock rising edge  
Input data hold after clock rising edge  
–25  
CLCL  
QVXH  
XHQX  
XHDX  
XHDV  
2 t  
0
–15  
CLCL  
5
Clock rising edge to input data valid  
10 t  
–133  
492  
CLCL  
NOTES:  
1. Parameters are valid over operating temperature range unless otherwise specified.  
2. Load capacitance for port 0, ALE, and PSEN = 100 pF, load capacitance for all outputs = 80 pF  
3. Interfacing the microcontroller to devices with float time up to 45 ns is permitted. This limited bus contention will not cause damage to port 0  
drivers.  
4. Parts are guaranteed by design to operate down to 0 Hz.  
5. Below 16 MHz this parameter is 8 t  
– 133.  
CLCL  
83  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
AC ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS (12-CLOCK MODE, 2.7 V TO 5.5 V OPERATION)  
1,2,3,4  
T
amb  
= 0 °C to +70 °C or –40 °C to +85 °C ; V = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, V = 0 V  
CC SS  
Symbol  
Figure  
Parameter  
Unit  
Limits  
MIN  
16 MHz Clock  
MAX  
MIN  
MAX  
1/t  
55  
50  
50  
50  
50  
50  
50  
50  
50  
50  
50  
50  
Oscillator frequency  
ALE pulse width  
0
16  
MHz  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
CLCL  
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
2t  
–10  
–15  
115  
LHLL  
CLCL  
Address valid to ALE LOW  
Address hold after ALE LOW  
ALE LOW to valid instruction in  
ALE LOW to PSEN LOW  
t
47.5  
37.5  
AVLL  
LLAX  
LLIV  
CLCL  
t
–25  
CLCL  
4 t  
CLCL  
3 t  
CLCL  
CLCL  
–55  
–55  
195  
t
–15  
47.5  
LLPL  
PLPH  
PLIV  
PXIX  
PXIZ  
AVIV  
PLAZ  
CLCL  
PSEN pulse width  
3 t  
–15  
172.5  
CLCL  
PSEN LOW to valid instruction in  
Input instruction hold after PSEN  
Input instruction float after PSEN  
Address to valid instruction in  
PSEN LOW to address float  
132.5  
0
0
t
–10  
52.5  
262.5  
10  
CLCL  
5 t  
10  
–50  
Data Memory  
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
51  
RD pulse width  
6 t  
6 t  
–25  
–25  
350  
350  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
RLRH  
WLWH  
RLDV  
RHDX  
RHDZ  
LLDV  
CLCL  
52  
WR pulse width  
CLCL  
51  
RD LOW to valid data in  
Data hold after RD  
5 t  
–50  
262.5  
CLCL  
51  
0
0
51  
Data float after RD  
2 t  
CLCL  
8 t  
CLCL  
9 t  
CLCL  
3 t  
CLCL  
–20  
–55  
–50  
+20  
105  
51  
ALE LOW to valid data in  
Address to valid data in  
ALE LOW to RD or WR LOW  
Address valid to WR LOW or RD LOW  
Data valid to WR transition  
Data hold after WR  
445  
51  
512.5  
207.5  
AVDV  
LLWL  
51, 52  
51, 52  
52  
3 t  
4 t  
–20  
–20  
167.5  
230  
CLCL  
AVWL  
QVWX  
WHQX  
QVWH  
RLAZ  
WHLH  
CLCL  
t
t
–30  
32.5  
42.5  
427.5  
CLCL  
CLCL  
52  
–20  
–10  
52  
Data valid to WR HIGH  
RD LOW to address float  
RD or WR HIGH to ALE HIGH  
7 t  
CLCL  
51  
0
0
51, 52  
t
–15  
t
+15  
47.5  
77.5  
CLCL  
CLCL  
External Clock  
t
t
t
t
55  
55  
55  
55  
High time  
Low time  
Rise time  
Fall time  
0.32 t  
0.32 t  
t
t
– t  
– t  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
CHCX  
CLCX  
CLCH  
CHCL  
CLCL  
CLCL  
CLCL  
CLCX  
CHCX  
CLCL  
5
5
Shift register  
t
t
t
t
t
54  
54  
54  
54  
54  
Serial port clock cycle time  
12 t  
10 t  
750  
600  
110  
0
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
XLXL  
CLCL  
Output data setup to clock rising edge  
Output data hold after clock rising edge  
Input data hold after clock rising edge  
–25  
CLCL  
QVXH  
XHQX  
XHDX  
XHDV  
2 t  
0
–15  
CLCL  
5
Clock rising edge to input data valid  
10 t  
–133  
492  
CLCL  
NOTES:  
1. Parameters are valid over operating temperature range unless otherwise specified.  
2. Load capacitance for port 0, ALE, and PSEN = 100 pF, load capacitance for all outputs = 80 pF  
3. Interfacing the microcontroller to devices with float time up to 45 ns is permitted. This limited bus contention will not cause damage to port 0  
drivers.  
4. Parts are guaranteed by design to operate down to 0 Hz.  
5. Below 16 MHz this parameter is 8 t  
– 133.  
CLCL  
84  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
AC ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS (6-CLOCK MODE, 5 V ±10% OPERATION)  
1,2,3,4,5  
T
amb  
= 0 °C to +70 °C or –40 °C to +85 °C ; V = 5 V ±10%, V = 0 V  
CC SS  
Symbol  
Figure  
Parameter  
Unit  
Limits  
MIN  
16 MHz Clock  
MAX  
MIN  
MAX  
1/t  
55  
50  
50  
50  
50  
50  
50  
50  
50  
50  
50  
50  
Oscillator frequency  
ALE pulse width  
0
30  
MHz  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
CLCL  
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
–8  
54.5  
LHLL  
CLCL  
Address valid to ALE LOW  
Address hold after ALE LOW  
ALE LOW to valid instruction in  
ALE LOW to PSEN LOW  
0.5 t  
0.5 t  
–13  
–20  
18.25  
11.25  
AVLL  
LLAX  
LLIV  
CLCL  
CLCL  
2 t  
CLCL  
–35  
90  
0.5 t  
1.5 t  
–10  
–10  
21.25  
83.75  
LLPL  
PLPH  
PLIV  
PXIX  
PXIZ  
AVIV  
PLAZ  
CLCL  
PSEN pulse width  
CLCL  
PSEN LOW to valid instruction in  
Input instruction hold after PSEN  
Input instruction float after PSEN  
Address to valid instruction in  
PSEN LOW to address float  
1.5 t  
–35  
58.75  
CLCL  
0
0
0.5 t  
2.5 t  
10  
–10  
–35  
21.25  
121.25  
10  
CLCL  
CLCL  
Data Memory  
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
51  
RD pulse width  
3 t  
3 t  
–20  
167.5  
167.5  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
RLRH  
WLWH  
RLDV  
RHDX  
RHDZ  
LLDV  
CLCL  
52  
WR pulse width  
–20  
CLCL  
51  
RD LOW to valid data in  
Data hold after RD  
2.5 t  
–35  
121.25  
CLCL  
51  
0
0
51  
Data float after RD  
t
–10  
52.5  
CLCL  
51  
ALE LOW to valid data in  
Address to valid data in  
ALE LOW to RD or WR LOW  
Address valid to WR LOW or RD LOW  
Data valid to WR transition  
Data hold after WR  
4 t  
CLCL  
–35  
215  
51  
4.5 t  
–35  
+15  
246.25  
108.75  
AVDV  
LLWL  
CLCL  
CLCL  
51, 52  
51, 52  
52  
1.5 t  
–15  
1.5 t  
78.75  
110  
CLCL  
2 t  
CLCL  
–15  
AVWL  
QVWX  
WHQX  
QVWH  
RLAZ  
WHLH  
0.5 t  
0.5 t  
3.5 t  
–25  
6.25  
CLCL  
CLCL  
CLCL  
52  
–15  
–5  
16.25  
213.75  
52  
Data valid to WR HIGH  
RD LOW to address float  
RD or WR HIGH to ALE HIGH  
51  
0
0
51, 52  
0.5 t  
–10  
0.5 t  
+10  
21.25  
41.25  
CLCL  
CLCL  
External Clock  
t
t
t
t
55  
55  
55  
55  
High time  
Low time  
Rise time  
Fall time  
0.4 t  
0.4 t  
t
t
– t  
– t  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
CHCX  
CLCX  
CLCH  
CHCL  
CLCL  
CLCL  
CLCX  
CHCX  
CLCL  
CLCL  
5
5
Shift register  
t
t
t
t
t
54  
54  
54  
54  
54  
Serial port clock cycle time  
6 t  
5 t  
375  
287.5  
47.5  
0
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
XLXL  
CLCL  
Output data setup to clock rising edge  
–25  
CLCL  
QVXH  
XHQX  
XHDX  
XHDV  
Output data hold after clock rising edge  
Input data hold after clock rising edge  
t
–15  
CLCL  
0
6
Clock rising edge to input data valid  
5 t  
CLCL  
–133  
179.5  
NOTES:  
1. Parameters are valid over operating temperature range unless otherwise specified.  
2. Load capacitance for port 0, ALE, and PSEN=100 pF, load capacitance for all outputs = 80 pF  
3. Interfacing the microcontroller to devices with float time up to 45ns is permitted. This limited bus contention will not cause damage to port 0  
drivers.  
4. Parts are guaranteed by design to operate down to 0 Hz.  
5. Data shown in the table are the best mathematical models for the set of measured values obtained in tests. If a particular parameter  
calculated at a customer specified frequency has a negative value, it should be considered equal to zero.  
6. Below 16 MHz this parameter is 4 t  
– 133  
CLCL  
85  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
AC ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS (6-CLOCK MODE, 2.7 V TO 5.5 V OPERATION)  
1,2,3,4,5  
T
amb  
= 0 °C to +70 °C or –40 °C to +85 °C ; V =2.7 V to 5.5 V, V = 0 V  
CC SS  
Symbol  
Figure  
Parameter  
Unit  
Limits  
MIN  
16 MHz Clock  
MAX  
MIN  
MAX  
1/t  
55  
50  
50  
50  
50  
50  
50  
50  
50  
50  
50  
50  
Oscillator frequency  
ALE pulse width  
0
16  
MHz  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
CLCL  
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
–10  
52.5  
16.25  
6.25  
LHLL  
CLCL  
Address valid to ALE LOW  
Address hold after ALE LOW  
ALE LOW to valid instruction in  
ALE LOW to PSEN LOW  
0.5 t  
0.5 t  
–15  
–25  
AVLL  
LLAX  
LLIV  
CLCL  
CLCL  
2 t  
CLCL  
–55  
70  
0.5 t  
1.5 t  
–15  
–15  
16.25  
78.75  
LLPL  
PLPH  
PLIV  
PXIX  
PXIZ  
AVIV  
PLAZ  
CLCL  
PSEN pulse width  
CLCL  
PSEN LOW to valid instruction in  
Input instruction hold after PSEN  
Input instruction float after PSEN  
Address to valid instruction in  
PSEN LOW to address float  
1.5 t  
–55  
38.75  
CLCL  
0
0
0.5 t  
2.5 t  
10  
–10  
–50  
21.25  
101.25  
10  
CLCL  
CLCL  
Data Memory  
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
51  
RD pulse width  
3 t  
3 t  
–25  
162.5  
162.5  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
RLRH  
WLWH  
RLDV  
RHDX  
RHDZ  
LLDV  
CLCL  
52  
WR pulse width  
–25  
CLCL  
51  
RD LOW to valid data in  
Data hold after RD  
2.5 t  
–50  
106.25  
CLCL  
51  
0
0
51  
Data float after RD  
t
–20  
42.5  
CLCL  
51  
ALE LOW to valid data in  
Address to valid data in  
ALE LOW to RD or WR LOW  
Address valid to WR LOW or RD LOW  
Data valid to WR transition  
Data hold after WR  
4 t  
CLCL  
–55  
195  
51  
4.5 t  
–50  
+20  
231.25  
113.75  
AVDV  
LLWL  
CLCL  
CLCL  
51, 52  
51, 52  
52  
1.5 t  
–20  
1.5 t  
73.75  
105  
CLCL  
2 t  
CLCL  
–20  
AVWL  
QVWX  
WHQX  
QVWH  
RLAZ  
WHLH  
0.5 t  
0.5 t  
3.5 t  
–30  
1.25  
CLCL  
CLCL  
CLCL  
52  
–20  
–10  
11.25  
208.75  
52  
Data valid to WR HIGH  
RD LOW to address float  
RD or WR HIGH to ALE HIGH  
51  
0
0
51, 52  
0.5 t  
–15  
0.5 t  
+15  
16.25  
46.25  
CLCL  
CLCL  
External Clock  
t
t
t
t
55  
55  
55  
55  
High time  
Low time  
Rise time  
Fall time  
0.4 t  
0.4 t  
t
t
– t  
– t  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
CHCX  
CLCX  
CLCH  
CHCL  
CLCL  
CLCL  
CLCX  
CHCX  
CLCL  
CLCL  
5
5
Shift register  
t
t
t
t
t
54  
54  
54  
54  
54  
Serial port clock cycle time  
6 t  
5 t  
375  
287.5  
47.5  
0
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
XLXL  
CLCL  
Output data setup to clock rising edge  
Output data hold after clock rising edge  
Input data hold after clock rising edge  
–25  
CLCL  
QVXH  
XHQX  
XHDX  
XHDV  
t
–15  
CLCL  
0
6
Clock rising edge to input data valid  
5 t  
CLCL  
–133  
179.5  
NOTES:  
1. Parameters are valid over operating temperature range unless otherwise specified.  
2. Load capacitance for port 0, ALE, and PSEN=100 pF, load capacitance for all outputs = 80 pF  
3. Interfacing the microcontroller to devices with float time up to 45ns is permitted. This limited bus contention will not cause damage to port 0  
drivers.  
4. Parts are guaranteed by design to operate down to 0 Hz.  
5. Data shown in the table are the best mathematical models for the set of measured values obtained in tests. If a particular parameter  
calculated at a customer specified frequency has a negative value, it should be considered equal to zero.  
6. Below 16 MHz this parameter is 4 t  
– 133  
CLCL  
86  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
2
I C-BUS INTERFACE TIMING (5 V, 3.5 MHZ TO 16 MHZ) NOT TESTED, GUARANTEED BY DESIGN  
All values referred to V  
and V  
levels; see Figure TBD  
IH(min)  
IL(max)  
2
Symbol  
Figure  
Parameter  
Unit  
I C-BUS  
STANDARD MODE  
FAST MODE  
MIN  
0
MAX  
100  
MIN  
0
MAX  
400  
f
t
SCL clock frequency  
kHz  
SCL  
Bus free time between a STOP and START  
condition  
4.7  
1.3  
µs  
BUF  
t
Hold time (repeated) START condition. After this 4.0  
period, the first clock pulse is generated  
0.6  
µs  
HD; STA  
t
t
t
t
LOW period of the SCL clock  
4.7  
4.0  
4.7  
1.3  
0.6  
0.6  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
LOW  
High period of the SCL clock  
HIGH  
Set-up time for a repeated START condition  
SU; STA  
HD;DAT  
Data hold time:  
– for CBUS compatible masters (notes 1, 3)  
5.0  
0
0
0.9  
2
– for I C–bus devices (notes 1, 2)  
3
t
t
t
t
Data set-up time  
250  
100  
ns  
ns  
SU;DAT  
4
20 + 0.1 c  
b
300  
, t  
FD FC  
Rise time of both SDA and SCL signals  
Fall time of both SDA and SCL signals  
Set-up time for STOP condition  
Capacitive load for each bus line  
1000  
300  
, t  
FD FC  
4.0  
0.6  
µs  
pF  
ns  
SU; STO  
C
400  
400  
50  
b
t
SP  
Pulse width of spikes which must be suppressed  
by the input filter  
0
NOTES:  
1. A device must internally provide a hold time of at least 300 ns for the SDA signal (referred to the V  
the undefined region of the falling edge of SCL.  
of the SCL signal) in order to bridge  
IHmin  
2. The maximum t  
has only to be met if the device does not stretch the LOW period (t  
of the SCL signal.  
HD;DAT  
LOW)  
2
2
3. A fast mode I C-bus device can be used in a standard mode I C-bus system, but the requirement t  
> 250 ns must then be met. This  
SU, DAT  
will automatically be the case if the device does not stretch the LOW period of the SCL signal. If such a device does stretch the LOW period  
of the SCL signal, it must output the next data bit to the SDA line t  
I C-bus specification) before the SCL line is released.  
+ t  
= 1000 + 250 = 1250 ns (according to the standard-mode  
R(max)  
SU<DAT  
2
4. C = total capacitance of one bus line in pF.  
b
87  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
EXPLANATION OF THE AC SYMBOLS  
Each timing symbol has five characters. The first character is always  
P – PSEN  
‘t’ (= time). The other characters, depending on their positions,  
indicate the name of a signal or the logical status of that signal. The  
Q – Output data  
R – RD signal  
designations are:  
A – Address  
t – Time  
V – Valid  
C – Clock  
W– WR signal  
D – Input data  
H – Logic level HIGH  
X – No longer a valid logic level  
Z – Float  
I
– Instruction (program memory contents)  
Examples: t  
= Time for address valid to ALE LOW.  
AVLL  
L – Logic level LOW, or ALE  
t
=Time for ALE LOW to PSEN LOW.  
LLPL  
t
LHLL  
ALE  
t
t
LLPL  
AVLL  
t
PLPH  
t
LLIV  
t
PLIV  
PSEN  
t
LLAX  
t
PXIZ  
t
PLAZ  
t
PXIX  
A0–A7  
INSTR IN  
A0–A7  
PORT 0  
PORT 2  
t
AVIV  
A0–A15  
A8–A15  
SU00006  
Figure 50. External Program Memory Read Cycle  
ALE  
PSEN  
RD  
t
WHLH  
t
LLDV  
t
t
LLWL  
RLRH  
t
RHDZ  
t
LLAX  
t
t
RLDV  
AVLL  
t
RLAZ  
t
RHDX  
A0–A7  
FROM RI OR DPL  
PORT 0  
DATA IN  
A0–A7 FROM PCL  
INSTR IN  
t
AVWL  
t
AVDV  
PORT 2  
P2.0–P2.7 OR A8–A15 FROM DPF  
A0–A15 FROM PCH  
SU00025  
Figure 51. External Data Memory Read Cycle  
88  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
ALE  
t
WHLH  
PSEN  
t
t
WLWH  
LLWL  
WR  
t
LLAX  
t
t
WHQX  
t
AVLL  
QVWX  
t
QVWH  
A0–A7  
FROM RI OR DPL  
PORT 0  
PORT 2  
DATA OUT  
A0–A7 FROM PCL  
INSTR IN  
t
AVWL  
P2.0–P2.7 OR A8–A15 FROM DPF  
A0–A15 FROM PCH  
SU00026  
Figure 52. External Data Memory Write Cycle  
repeated START condition  
START condition  
START or repeated START condition  
t
SU;STA  
STOP condition  
t
RD  
SDA  
(INPUT/OUTPUT)  
0.7 VDD  
0.3 VDD  
t
BUF  
t
t
t
FC  
FD  
RC  
t
SU; STO  
0.7 V  
DD  
SCL  
(INPUT/OUTPUT)  
0.3 V  
DD  
SU;DAT3  
t
SU01759  
t
t
t
t
t
t
HD;DAT  
SU;DAT2  
HD;STA  
LOW  
HIGH  
SU;DAT1  
2
Figure 53. Timing SIO1 (I C) interface  
89  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
INSTRUCTION  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ALE  
t
XLXL  
CLOCK  
t
XHQX  
t
QVXH  
OUTPUT DATA  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
WRITE TO SBUF  
t
XHDX  
t
SET TI  
VALID  
XHDV  
INPUT DATA  
CLEAR RI  
VALID  
VALID  
VALID  
VALID  
VALID  
VALID  
VALID  
SET RI  
SU00027  
Figure 54. Shift Register Mode Timing  
V
–0.5  
CC  
0.7V  
CC  
CC  
0.45V  
0.2V  
–0.1  
t
CHCX  
t
t
t
CHCL  
CLCX  
CLCH  
t
CLCL  
SU00009  
Figure 55. External Clock Drive  
V
–0.5  
CC  
V
+0.1V  
LOAD  
V
–0.1V  
TIMING  
REFERENCE  
POINTS  
OH  
V +0.1V  
OL  
0.2V  
+0.9  
–0.1  
CC  
V
LOAD  
0.2V  
CC  
V
–0.1V  
LOAD  
0.45V  
NOTE:  
NOTE:  
For timing purposes, a port is no longer floating when a 100mV change from  
load voltage occurs, and begins to float when a 100mV change from the loaded  
AC inputs during testing are driven at V –0.5 for a logic ‘1’ and 0.45V for a logic ‘0’.  
Timing measurements are made at V min for a logic ‘1’ and V max for a logic ‘0’.  
CC  
IH  
IL  
V
/V level occurs. I /I ≥ ±20mA.  
OH OL  
OH OL  
SU00717  
SU00718  
Figure 56. AC Testing Input/Output  
Figure 57. Float Waveform  
90  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
40  
35  
30  
MAX ACTIVE MODE  
I
MAX = 1.1   FREQ. + 1.0  
CC  
25  
20  
15  
10  
5
TYP ACTIVE MODE  
MAX IDLE MODE  
I
MAX = 0.22   FREQ. + 1.0  
CC  
TYP IDLE MODE  
4
8
12  
16  
20  
24  
28  
32  
36  
FREQ AT XTAL1 (MHz)  
SU01684  
Figure 58. I vs. FREQ for 12-clock operation  
CC  
Valid only within frequency specifications of the specified operating voltage  
/*  
##  
##  
##  
##  
##  
##  
as31 version V2.10  
/ *js* /  
source file: idd_ljmp1.asm  
list file: idd_ljmp1.lst  
created Fri Apr 20 15:51:40 2001  
##########################################################  
#0000  
#0000  
# AUXR equ 08Eh  
# CKCON equ 08Fh  
#
#
#0000  
# org 0  
#
# LJMP_LABEL:  
0000 /75;/8E;/01;  
0003 /02;/FF;/FD;  
0005 /00;  
#
#
#
#
MOV  
LJMP  
NOP  
AUXR,#001h  
LJMP_LABEL  
; turn off ALE  
; jump to end of address space  
#FFFD  
# org 0fffdh  
#
# LJMP_LABEL:  
#
FFFD /02;/FD;FF;  
*/”  
#
# ;  
#
LJMP LJMP_LABEL  
NOP  
#
SU01499  
Figure 59. Source code used in measuring I operational  
DD  
91  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
V
V
CC  
CC  
I
I
CC  
CC  
V
V
CC  
CC  
V
RST  
V
V
CC  
CC  
CC  
P0  
EA  
P0  
EA  
RST  
(NC)  
XTAL2  
XTAL1  
(NC)  
XTAL2  
XTAL1  
CLOCK SIGNAL  
CLOCK SIGNAL  
V
V
SS  
SS  
SU00719  
SU00720  
Figure 60. I Test Condition, Active Mode  
Figure 61. I Test Condition, Idle Mode  
CC  
CC  
All other pins are disconnected  
All other pins are disconnected  
V
–0.5  
CC  
0.7V  
CC  
–0.1  
0.45V  
0.2V  
CC  
t
CHCX  
t
t
t
CLCH  
CHCL  
CLCX  
t
CLCL  
SU00009  
Figure 62. Clock Signal Waveform for I Tests in Active and Idle Modes  
CC  
t
= t  
= 5ns  
CHCL  
CLCH  
V
CC  
CC  
I
CC  
V
CC  
V
RST  
P0  
EA  
(NC)  
XTAL2  
XTAL1  
V
SS  
SU00016  
Figure 63. I Test Condition, Power Down Mode  
CC  
All other pins are disconnected. V = 2 V to 5.5 V  
CC  
92  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
Program Verification  
EPROM CHARACTERISTICS  
If security bits 2 and 3 have not been programmed, the on-chip  
program memory can be read out for program verification. The  
address of the program memory locations to be read is applied to  
ports 1 and 2 as shown in Figure 66. The other pins are held at the  
‘Verify Code Data’ levels indicated in Table 17. The contents of the  
address location will be emitted on port 0. External pull-ups are  
required on port 0 for this operation.  
All these devices can be programmed by using a modified Improved  
Quick-Pulse Programming algorithm. It differs from older methods  
in the value used for V (programming supply voltage) and in the  
PP  
width and number of the ALE/PROG pulses.  
The family contains two signature bytes that can be read and used  
by an EPROM programming system to identify the device. The  
signature bytes identify the device as being manufactured by  
Philips.  
If the 64 byte encryption table has been programmed, the data  
presented at port 0 will be the exclusive NOR of the program byte  
with one of the encryption bytes. The user will have to know the  
encryption table contents in order to correctly decode the verification  
data. The encryption table itself cannot be read out.  
Table 17 shows the logic levels for reading the signature byte, and  
for programming the program memory, the encryption table, and the  
security bits. The circuit configuration and waveforms for quick-pulse  
programming are shown in Figures 64 and 65. Figure 66 shows the  
circuit configuration for normal program memory verification.  
Reading the Signature Bytes  
The signature bytes are read by the same procedure as a normal  
verification of locations 030H and 031H, except that P3.6 and P3.7  
need to be pulled to a logic LOW. The values are:  
(030H) = 15H indicates manufactured by Philips  
(031H) = C9H indicates P8xC66xX2  
Quick-Pulse Programming  
The setup for microcontroller quick-pulse programming is shown in  
Figure 64. Note that the device is running with a 4 to 6MHz  
oscillator. The reason the oscillator needs to be running is that the  
device is executing internal address and program data transfers.  
(060H) = 01H (660)  
02H (661)  
The address of the EPROM location to be programmed is applied to  
ports 1 and 2, as shown in Figure 64. The code byte to be  
programmed into that location is applied to port 0. RST, PSEN and  
pins of ports 2 and 3 specified in Table 17 are held at the ‘Program  
Code Data’ levels indicated in Table 17. The ALE/PROG is pulsed  
LOW 5 times as shown in Figure 65.  
Program/Verify Algorithms  
Any algorithm in agreement with the conditions listed in Table 17,  
and which satisfies the timing specifications, is suitable.  
Security Bits  
With none of the security bits programmed the code in the program  
memory can be verified. If the encryption table is programmed, the  
code will be encrypted when verified. When only security bit 1 (see  
Table 18) is programmed, MOVC instructions executed from  
external program memory are disabled from fetching code bytes  
from the internal memory, EA is latched on Reset and all further  
programming of the EPROM is disabled. When security bits 1 and 2  
are programmed, in addition to the above, verify mode is disabled.  
When all three security bits are programmed, all of the conditions  
above apply and all external program memory execution is disabled.  
To program the encryption table, repeat the 5 pulse programming  
sequence for addresses 0 through 1FH, using the ‘Pgm Encryption  
Table’ levels. Do not forget that after the encryption table is  
programmed, verification cycles will produce only encrypted data.  
To program the security bits, repeat the 5 pulse programming  
sequence using the ‘Pgm Security Bit’ levels. After one security bit is  
programmed, further programming of the code memory and  
encryption table is disabled. However, the other security bits can still  
be programmed.  
Note that the EA/V pin must not be allowed to go above the  
PP  
Encryption Array  
64 bytes of encryption array are initially unprogrammed (all 1s).  
maximum specified V level for any amount of time. Even a narrow  
PP  
glitch above that voltage can cause permanent damage to the  
device. The V source should be well regulated and free of glitches  
PP  
and overshoot.  
Trademark phrase of Intel Corporation.  
2003 Oct 02  
93  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
Table 17. EPROM Programming Modes  
MODE  
RST  
PSEN  
ALE/PROG  
EA/V  
P2.7  
0
P2.6  
0
P3.7  
0
P3.6  
0
P3.3  
X
PP  
Read signature  
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0*  
1
1
Program code data  
Verify code data  
1
V
PP  
1
0
1
1
X
1
1
0
0
1
1
X
Pgm encryption table  
Pgm security bit 1  
Pgm security bit 2  
Pgm security bit 3  
Program to 6-clock mode  
1
0*  
0*  
0*  
0*  
0*  
1
V
1
0
1
0
X
PP  
PP  
PP  
PP  
PP  
1
V
V
V
V
1
1
1
1
X
1
1
1
0
0
X
1
0
1
0
1
X
1
0
0
1
0
0
4
Verify 6-clock  
1
1
1
e
0
0
1
1
5
Verify security bits  
1
1
e
0
1
0
X
NOTES:  
1. ‘0’ = Valid LOW for that pin, ‘1’ = valid HIGH for that pin.  
2. V = 12.75 V ±0.25 V.  
PP  
3. V = 5 V±10% during programming and verification.  
CC  
4. Bit is output on P0.4 (1 = 12x, 0 = 6x).  
5. Security bit one is output on P0.7.  
Security bit two is output on P0.6.  
Security bit three is output on P0.3.  
*
ALE/PROG receives 5 programming pulses for code data (also for user array; 5 pulses for encryption or security bits) while V is held at  
PP  
12.75 V. Each programming pulse is LOW for 100 µs (±10 µs) and HIGH for a minimum of 10 µs.  
Table 18. Program Security Bits for EPROM Devices  
1, 2  
PROGRAM LOCK BITS  
SB1  
SB2  
SB3  
PROTECTION DESCRIPTION  
1
2
U
U
U
No Program Security features enabled. (Code verify will still be encrypted by the Encryption Array if  
programmed.)  
P
U
U
MOVC instructions executed from external program memory are disabled from fetching code bytes  
from internal memory, EA is sampled and latched on Reset, and further programming of the EPROM  
is disabled.  
3
P
P
P
P
U
P
Same as 2, also verify is disabled.  
4
Same as 3, external execution is disabled. Internal data RAM is not accessible.  
NOTES:  
1. P – programmed. U – unprogrammed.  
2. Any other combination of the security bits is not defined.  
94  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
+5V  
V
CC  
P0  
A0–A7  
P1  
PGM DATA  
1
1
1
RST  
P3.6  
+12.75V  
EA/V  
PP  
5 PULSES TO GROUND  
ALE/PROG  
PSEN  
P3.7  
0
1
OTP  
XTAL2  
P2.7  
0
P2.6  
4–6MHz  
XTAL1  
A8–A13  
P2.0–P2.5  
A14  
V
P3.4  
P3.5  
SS  
A15 (RD2 ONLY)  
A8–A15 are programming addresses  
(not external memory addresses per  
device pin out)  
SU01659  
Figure 64. Programming Configuration  
5 PULSES  
1
0
1
2
3
4
5
ALE/PROG:  
SEE EXPLODED VIEW BELOW  
t
= 10µs MIN  
GHGL  
t
= 100µs±10µs  
GLGH  
1
0
1
ALE/PROG:  
SU00875  
Figure 65. PROG Waveform  
+5V  
V
CC  
P0  
A0–A7  
PGM DATA  
P1  
1
1
1
RST  
P3.6  
1
1
0
EA/V  
PP  
ALE/PROG  
PSEN  
P3.7  
OTP  
0
0
ENABLE  
XTAL2  
P2.7  
P2.6  
4–6MHz  
XTAL1  
A8–A13  
P2.0–P2.5  
A14  
V
P3.4  
P3.5  
SS  
A15 (RD2 ONLY)  
A8–A15 are programming addresses  
(not external memory addresses per  
device pin out)  
SU01660  
Figure 66. Program Verification  
95  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
EPROM PROGRAMMING AND VERIFICATION CHARACTERISTICS  
T
amb  
= 21°C to +27°C, V = 5V±10%, V = 0V (See Figure 67)  
CC SS  
SYMBOL  
PARAMETER  
MIN  
MAX  
UNIT  
V
V
PP  
Programming supply voltage  
Programming supply current  
Oscillator frequency  
12.5  
13.0  
1
I
PP  
50  
mA  
MHz  
1/t  
CLCL  
4
6
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
Address setup to PROG LOW  
Address hold after PROG  
Data setup to PROG LOW  
Data hold after PROG  
48t  
AVGL  
CLCL  
CLCL  
CLCL  
CLCL  
CLCL  
48t  
48t  
48t  
48t  
GHAX  
DVGL  
GHDX  
EHSH  
SHGL  
GHSL  
GLGH  
AVQV  
ELQZ  
EHQZ  
GHGL  
P2.7 (ENABLE) HIGH to V  
PP  
V
PP  
V
PP  
setup to PROG LOW  
hold after PROG  
10  
10  
90  
µs  
µs  
µs  
PROG width  
110  
Address to data valid  
48t  
CLCL  
CLCL  
CLCL  
ENABLE LOW to data valid  
Data float after ENABLE  
48t  
48t  
0
PROG HIGH to PROG LOW  
10  
µs  
NOTE:  
1. Not tested.  
PROGRAMMING*  
VERIFICATION*  
ADDRESS  
P1.0–P1.7  
P2.0–P2.5  
P3.4  
ADDRESS  
(A0 – A14)  
t
AVQV  
PORT 0  
P0.0 – P0.7  
(D0 – D7)  
DATA IN  
DATA OUT  
t
t
t
DVGL  
GHDX  
GHAX  
t
AVGL  
ALE/PROG  
t
t
GLGH  
GHGL  
t
t
SHGL  
GHSL  
LOGIC 1  
LOGIC 1  
EA/V  
PP  
LOGIC 0  
t
t
t
EHSH  
ELQV  
EHQZ  
P2.7  
**  
SU00871  
NOTES:  
*
FOR PROGRAMMING CONFIGURATION SEE FIGURE 64.  
FOR VERIFICATION CONDITIONS SEE FIGURE 66.  
** SEE TABLE 17.  
Figure 67. EPROM Programming and Verification  
96  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
MASK ROM DEVICES  
from the internal memory, EA is latched on Reset and all further  
programming of the EPROM is disabled. When security bits 1 and 2  
are programmed, in addition to the above, verify mode is disabled.  
Security Bits  
With none of the security bits programmed the code in the program  
memory can be verified. If the encryption table is programmed, the  
code will be encrypted when verified. When only security bit 1 (see  
Table 19) is programmed, MOVC instructions executed from  
external program memory are disabled from fetching code bytes  
Encryption Array  
64 bytes of encryption array are initially unprogrammed (all 1s).  
Table 19. Program Security Bits  
1, 2  
PROGRAM LOCK BITS  
SB1  
SB2  
PROTECTION DESCRIPTION  
1
U
U
No Program Security features enabled.  
(Code verify will still be encrypted by the Encryption Array if programmed.)  
2
P
U
MOVC instructions executed from external program memory are disabled from fetching code bytes from  
internal memory, EA is sampled and latched on Reset, and further programming of the EPROM is disabled.  
NOTES:  
1. P – programmed. U – unprogrammed.  
2. Any other combination of the security bits is not defined.  
97  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
ROM CODE SUBMISSION FOR 16K ROM DEVICES (83C66x)  
When submitting ROM code for the 16K ROM devices, the following must be specified:  
1. 16k byte user ROM data  
2. 64 byte ROM encryption key  
3. ROM security bits.  
ADDRESS  
CONTENT  
DATA  
BIT(S)  
7:0  
COMMENT  
0000H to 3FFFH  
4000H to 403FH  
User ROM Data  
KEY  
7:0  
ROM Encryption Key  
FFH = no encryption  
4040H  
4040H  
SEC  
SEC  
0
1
ROM Security Bit 1  
0 = enable security  
1 = disable security  
ROM Security Bit 2  
0 = enable security  
1 = disable security  
Security Bit 1: When programmed, this bit has two effects on masked ROM parts:  
1. External MOVC is disabled, and  
2. EA is latched on Reset.  
Security Bit 2: When programmed, this bit inhibits Verify User ROM.  
NOTE: Security Bit 2 cannot be enabled unless Security Bit 1 is enabled.  
If the ROM Code file does not include the options, the following information must be included with the ROM code.  
For each of the following, check the appropriate box, and send to Philips along with the code:  
Security Bit #1:  
Security Bit #2:  
Encryption:  
V Enabled  
V Enabled  
V No  
V Disabled  
V Disabled  
V Yes  
If Yes, must send key file.  
98  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
PLCC44: plastic leaded chip carrier; 44 leads  
SOT187-2  
99  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
LQFP44: plastic low profile quad flat package; 44 leads; body 10 x 10 x 1.4 mm  
SOT389-1  
100  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
REVISION HISTORY  
Rev  
Date  
Description  
_3  
20031002  
Product data (9397 750 12144); ECN 853-2416 30396 dated 2003 September 30  
Modifications:  
Corrected pin description for V  
SS  
Corrected AUXR (Figure 48).  
_2  
_1  
20030619  
20030312  
Product data (9397 750 11439); ECN 853-2416 29870 dated 2003 Apr 28  
Product data (9397 750 11126); ECN 853-2416 29538 dated 2003 Feb 13  
101  
2003 Oct 02  
Philips Semiconductors  
Product data  
80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 16 KB OTP/ROM, 512B  
RAM, low voltage (2.7 to 5.5 V), low power, high speed (30/33  
MHz), two 400KB I2C interfaces  
P8xC660X2/661X2  
2
2
Purchase of Philips I C components conveys a license under the Philips’ I C patent  
2
to use the components in the I C system provided the system conforms to the  
I C specifications defined by Philips. This specification can be ordered using the  
2
code 9398 393 40011.  
Data sheet status  
Product  
status  
Definitions  
[1]  
Level  
Data sheet status  
[2] [3]  
I
Objective data  
Development  
This data sheet contains data from the objective specification for product development.  
Philips Semiconductors reserves the right to change the specification in any manner without notice.  
II  
Preliminary data  
Qualification  
Production  
This data sheet contains data from the preliminary specification. Supplementary data will be published  
at a later date. Philips Semiconductors reserves the right to change the specification without notice, in  
order to improve the design and supply the best possible product.  
III  
Product data  
This data sheet contains data from the product specification. Philips Semiconductors reserves the  
right to make changes at any time in order to improve the design, manufacturing and supply. Relevant  
changes will be communicated via a Customer Product/Process Change Notification (CPCN).  
[1] Please consult the most recently issued data sheet before initiating or completing a design.  
[2] The product status of the device(s) described in this data sheet may have changed since this data sheet was published. The latest information is available on the Internet at URL  
http://www.semiconductors.philips.com.  
[3] For data sheets describing multiple type numbers, the highest-level product status determines the data sheet status.  
Definitions  
Short-form specification — The data in a short-form specification is extracted from a full data sheet with the same type number and title. For detailed information see  
the relevant data sheet or data handbook.  
LimitingvaluesdefinitionLimiting values given are in accordance with the Absolute Maximum Rating System (IEC 60134). Stress above one or more of the limiting  
values may cause permanent damage to the device. These are stress ratings only and operation of the device at these or at any other conditions above those given  
in the Characteristics sections of the specification is not implied. Exposure to limiting values for extended periods may affect device reliability.  
Application information — Applications that are described herein for any of these products are for illustrative purposes only. Philips Semiconductors make no  
representation or warranty that such applications will be suitable for the specified use without further testing or modification.  
Disclaimers  
Life support — These products are not designed for use in life support appliances, devices, or systems where malfunction of these products can reasonably be  
expected to result in personal injury. Philips Semiconductors customers using or selling these products for use in such applications do so at their own risk and agree  
to fully indemnify Philips Semiconductors for any damages resulting from such application.  
Right to make changes — Philips Semiconductors reserves the right to make changes in the products—including circuits, standard cells, and/or software—described  
or contained herein in order to improve design and/or performance. When the product is in full production (status ‘Production’), relevant changes will be communicated  
viaaCustomerProduct/ProcessChangeNotification(CPCN).PhilipsSemiconductorsassumesnoresponsibilityorliabilityfortheuseofanyoftheseproducts,conveys  
nolicenseortitleunderanypatent, copyright, ormaskworkrighttotheseproducts, andmakesnorepresentationsorwarrantiesthattheseproductsarefreefrompatent,  
copyright, or mask work right infringement, unless otherwise specified.  
Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. 2003  
Contact information  
All rights reserved. Printed in U.S.A.  
For additional information please visit  
http://www.semiconductors.philips.com.  
Fax: +31 40 27 24825  
Date of release: 10-03  
9397 750 12144  
For sales offices addresses send e-mail to:  
sales.addresses@www.semiconductors.philips.com.  
Document order number:  
Philips  
Semiconductors  

相关型号:

P83C661X2BBD

80C51 8-bit microcontroller family
NXP

P83C661X2FA

80C51 8-bit microcontroller family
NXP

P83C748EBA

IC 8-BIT, MROM, 16 MHz, MICROCONTROLLER, PQCC28, PLASTIC, LCC-28, Microcontroller
NXP

P83C748EBA-T

IC 8-BIT, MROM, 16 MHz, MICROCONTROLLER, PQCC28, PLASTIC, LCC-28, Microcontroller
NXP

P83C748EBAA

80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 2K/64 OTP/ROM, low pin count
NXP

P83C748EBAA-T

IC 8-BIT, MROM, 16 MHz, MICROCONTROLLER, PQCC28, PLASTIC, LCC-28, Microcontroller
NXP

P83C748EBB

IC 8-BIT, MROM, 16 MHz, MICROCONTROLLER, PQFP24, PLASTIC, QFP-24, Microcontroller
NXP

P83C748EBB-T

IC 8-BIT, MROM, 16 MHz, MICROCONTROLLER, PQFP24, PLASTIC, QFP-24, Microcontroller
NXP

P83C748EBBB

IC 8-BIT, MROM, 16 MHz, MICROCONTROLLER, PQFP24, PLASTIC, QFP-24, Microcontroller
NXP

P83C748EBBB-T

IC 8-BIT, MROM, 16 MHz, MICROCONTROLLER, PQFP24, PLASTIC, QFP-24, Microcontroller
NXP

P83C748EBD

IC,MICROCONTROLLER,8-BIT,8051 CPU,CMOS,SSOP,24PIN,PLASTIC
NXP

P83C748EBDDB

80C51 8-bit microcontroller family 2K/64 OTP/ROM, low pin count
NXP